1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
8 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
10 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
11 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
12 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
13 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
14 % the documentation team
15 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
17 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
18 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
20 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
21 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
23 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
25 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
26 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
28 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
29 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
30 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
31 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
33 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
37 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
38 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
40 % for customized page headers/footers
41 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
43 % change header rule width
44 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
46 % used to have extra space in table cells
47 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
48 {\usepackage{array}}{}
49 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
51 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
52 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
53 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
55 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
57 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
58 \use_default_options false
63 \maintain_unincluded_children false
65 \language_package default
68 \font_roman "default" "default"
69 \font_sans "default" "default"
70 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
71 \font_math "auto" "auto"
72 \font_default_family default
73 \use_non_tex_fonts false
76 \font_sf_scale 100 100
77 \font_tt_scale 100 100
79 \default_output_format default
81 \bibtex_command bibtex
82 \index_command default
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 0
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 0
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 0
110 \use_package stmaryrd 0
111 \use_package undertilde 0
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
121 \notefontcolor #0000ff
138 \paragraph_separation indent
139 \paragraph_indentation default
140 \quotes_language english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes true
145 \output_changes false
149 \author -195340706 "Georg Baum"
151 \author 2047637253 "Guillaume Munch"
162 by the \SpecialChar LyX
167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
169 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
170 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
171 Documentation mailing list:
172 \begin_inset CommandInset href
174 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
185 \begin_inset Newline newline
189 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 \begin_inset Note Note
196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
197 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
198 \begin_inset Newline newline
203 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
204 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
212 \begin_layout Standard
213 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
214 LatexCommand tableofcontents
221 \begin_layout Chapter
225 \begin_layout Section
226 What is \SpecialChar LyX
230 \begin_layout Standard
232 is a document preparation system.
233 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
234 scripts, publishable books, business
235 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
236 It is unlike most other
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
244 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
246 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
262 pt type, left justified, 5
263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
272 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
276 \begin_layout Standard
277 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 \change_inserted 5863208 1447554393
286 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
290 \begin_layout Standard
295 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
296 's philosophy: most importantly,
297 the format of all of the manuals.
298 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
299 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
305 manual describes that, too.
308 \begin_layout Section
313 \begin_layout Standard
314 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
315 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
317 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
318 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
322 \begin_layout Standard
323 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
324 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
325 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
327 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
328 only a vertical scrollbar.
329 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
330 The first case is large images.
331 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
332 image and use the option
343 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
346 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
347 this doesn't work for equations yet.
350 \begin_layout Standard
351 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
352 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
360 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
367 \begin_layout Section
371 \begin_layout Standard
372 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
374 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
376 Just select the manual you want to read from the
383 \begin_layout Section
384 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
388 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
395 \begin_layout Standard
396 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
397 can be configured via the menu
399 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
403 \begin_inset Index idx
406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
413 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
415 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 packages are available.
417 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
419 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
421 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
426 \begin_inset space \space{}
429 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
430 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
432 To force \SpecialChar LyX
433 to re-inspect your system, you should use
435 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
439 \begin_inset Index idx
442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
443 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
449 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
450 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
453 \begin_layout Section
456 \begin_inset CommandInset label
458 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
465 \begin_layout Standard
466 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
467 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
468 installed, but you will not be
469 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
470 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
471 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
472 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
473 document can always be output as plain text
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 or DocBook classes or packages.
480 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
481 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
484 \begin_layout Standard
485 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
486 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
487 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
490 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
498 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
499 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
502 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
506 \begin_inset Note Note
509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
510 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
511 Code box prevent that the term
512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
520 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
521 More about \SpecialChar TeX
522 Code is described in section
527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
529 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
533 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
534 is explained in section
539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
541 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
551 \begin_inset Index idx
554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
555 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
561 See section 5.1 of the
565 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
569 \begin_layout Chapter
570 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
574 \begin_layout Section
575 Basic File Operations
576 \begin_inset Index idx
579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
588 \begin_layout Standard
593 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
594 in addition to some more advanced operations:
597 \begin_layout Itemize
619 \begin_layout Itemize
635 arg "buffer-new-template"
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
673 \begin_layout Itemize
687 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \begin_layout Itemize
721 arg "buffer-write-as"
727 \begin_layout Itemize
741 \begin_layout Itemize
755 \begin_layout Standard
756 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
757 a few minor differences.
760 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
771 command lists the available templates.
772 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
773 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
774 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
782 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
789 \begin_layout Standard
790 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
822 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
823 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
824 is just that — a big, blank space.
832 \begin_layout Standard
853 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
858 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
861 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
879 will reload the document from disk.
880 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
881 and want to restore it to the last save.
890 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
891 them as your changes.
894 \begin_layout Section
895 Basic Editing Features
896 \begin_inset Index idx
899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
906 \begin_inset CommandInset label
908 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
915 \begin_layout Standard
916 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
917 can perform cut and paste operations
918 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
919 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
920 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
921 editing features and how to access
923 We will start with cut and paste.
926 \begin_layout Standard
927 As you might expect, the
931 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
932 various other editing features.
933 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
937 \begin_layout Itemize
943 \begin_inset Index idx
946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
975 \begin_layout Itemize
981 \begin_inset Index idx
984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1013 \begin_layout Itemize
1019 \begin_inset Index idx
1022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1047 \begin_layout Itemize
1051 \begin_inset space ~
1057 \begin_layout Itemize
1061 \begin_inset space ~
1067 \begin_layout Itemize
1071 \begin_inset space ~
1075 \begin_inset space ~
1081 \begin_inset Index idx
1084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1093 \begin_inset Index idx
1096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1111 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1121 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1127 \begin_layout Standard
1128 The first three are self-explanatory.
1129 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1130 and other programs by
1151 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1152 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1157 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1158 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1159 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1160 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1161 into individual cells.
1165 \begin_inset space ~
1170 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1171 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1175 \begin_layout Standard
1179 \begin_inset space ~
1184 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1186 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1188 \begin_inset space ~
1195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1201 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1202 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1203 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1209 \begin_inset space \space{}
1212 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1213 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1216 \begin_inset space ~
1219 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1238 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1239 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1241 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1245 \begin_inset space ~
1250 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1251 start a new paragraph.
1252 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1253 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1258 \begin_inset space ~
1261 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1278 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1281 paste from the primary selection.
1282 This is normally the currently selected text.
1285 \begin_layout Standard
1288 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1290 \begin_inset space ~
1294 \begin_inset space ~
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1312 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1318 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1321 \begin_inset space ~
1330 \begin_inset space ~
1335 button to skip the current word.
1339 \begin_inset space ~
1344 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1348 \begin_inset space ~
1353 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1355 If the toggle is set, searching for
1356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1367 will not match the word
1368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1382 Match whole words only
1384 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1385 to only find complete words, e.
1386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1415 offers also an advanced
1418 \begin_inset space ~
1422 \begin_inset space ~
1427 feature that is described in sec.
1428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1434 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1441 \begin_layout Standard
1442 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1443 \begin_inset space \space{}
1447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1455 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1457 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1462 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1469 \begin_layout Standard
1473 arg "inset-select-all"
1476 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1477 When the cursor is inside an inset
1480 arg "inset-select-all"
1483 selects the content of the inset.
1487 arg "inset-select-all"
1490 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1495 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1498 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1502 \begin_layout Section
1504 \begin_inset Index idx
1507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1514 \begin_inset Index idx
1517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1526 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1533 \begin_layout Standard
1534 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1536 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1539 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1542 or the toolbar button
1548 to undo some mistake.
1549 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1551 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1554 or the toolbar button
1561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1568 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1569 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1572 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1575 \begin_layout Standard
1576 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1585 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1586 This is a consequence of the 100
1587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1590 step undo limit mentioned above.
1593 \begin_layout Standard
1602 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1604 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1608 \begin_layout Section
1610 \begin_inset Index idx
1613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1622 \begin_layout Standard
1623 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1631 \begin_layout Itemize
1636 once anywhere in the edit window.
1637 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1641 \begin_layout Enumerate
1646 \begin_layout Itemize
1653 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1656 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1659 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1660 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1663 \begin_layout Itemize
1664 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1667 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1674 \begin_layout Enumerate
1675 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1679 \begin_layout Standard
1680 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1681 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1685 \begin_layout Section
1687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1689 name "sec:Navigating"
1694 \begin_inset Index idx
1697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1706 \begin_layout Standard
1708 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1711 \begin_layout Itemize
1716 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1717 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1720 \begin_layout Itemize
1721 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1723 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1725 \begin_inset space ~
1730 or by the toolbar button
1733 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1739 \begin_layout Itemize
1740 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1742 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1745 and use the same menu to return to them.
1746 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1749 \begin_layout Standard
1753 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1758 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1759 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1761 \begin_inset space ~
1766 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1767 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1768 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1769 your last editing position.
1772 \begin_layout Standard
1777 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1781 \begin_layout Subsection
1783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1785 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1792 \begin_layout Standard
1793 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1794 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1795 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1803 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1807 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1808 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1814 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1819 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1823 \begin_layout Standard
1824 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1825 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1826 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1827 dialog and to modify the citation.
1830 \begin_layout Standard
1831 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1833 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1834 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1842 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1845 \begin_layout Standard
1846 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1847 you further to control the display.
1852 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1853 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1859 option keeps it in the current view state.
1860 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1861 \begin_inset space ~
1864 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1865 \begin_inset space ~
1868 3, the subsections of sections
1869 \begin_inset space ~
1872 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1877 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1878 \begin_inset space ~
1882 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1892 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1895 \begin_layout Standard
1902 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1903 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1917 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1918 So, for example, you can move section
1919 \begin_inset space ~
1923 \begin_inset space ~
1926 2.4 or after section
1927 \begin_inset space ~
1932 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1945 (or the corresponding key bindings
1953 ) you can change the level of sections.
1954 So you can for example make section
1955 \begin_inset space ~
1959 \begin_inset space ~
1963 \begin_inset space ~
1969 \begin_layout Section
1970 Input/Word Completion
1971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1973 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1978 \begin_inset Index idx
1981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1988 \begin_inset Index idx
1991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2022 \begin_layout Standard
2024 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2026 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2027 is used to propose completions.
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2034 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2039 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2046 \begin_inset space ~
2050 \begin_inset space ~
2055 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2059 \begin_inset space ~
2064 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2065 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2069 \begin_inset space ~
2075 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2076 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2077 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2078 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2081 \begin_layout Standard
2083 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2084 completions available.
2089 key to accept a proposed completion.
2090 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2091 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2092 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2099 \begin_layout Standard
2100 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2101 ing options for text.
2102 The special math option
2106 enables characters to be composed.
2107 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2108 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2111 , you can then input the characters
2112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2123 to a formula to get it.
2124 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2125 of the math toolbar.
2126 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2130 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2131 's installation folder.
2132 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2141 \begin_layout Section
2143 \begin_inset Index idx
2146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2153 \begin_inset Index idx
2156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2185 \begin_inset Index idx
2188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2219 \begin_layout Standard
2220 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2234 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2237 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2241 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2248 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2255 \begin_layout Standard
2259 \begin_inset space ~
2267 \begin_inset space ~
2288 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2292 \begin_layout Labeling
2293 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2297 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2298 LatexCommand nomenclature
2300 description "Tabulator key"
2306 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2308 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2309 \begin_inset space ~
2313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2315 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2322 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2326 , especially section
2327 \begin_inset space ~
2331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2333 reference "subsec:Lists"
2339 If you are still confused, look in the
2344 \begin_inset Newline newline
2352 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2353 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2357 \begin_layout Labeling
2358 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2362 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2363 LatexCommand nomenclature
2365 description "Escape key"
2372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2379 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2380 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2383 \begin_layout Labeling
2384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2390 \begin_inset space ~
2394 \begin_inset space ~
2401 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2402 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2406 \begin_layout Standard
2407 There are three modifier keys:
2410 \begin_layout Labeling
2411 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2429 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2430 LatexCommand nomenclature
2432 description "Control key"
2436 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2437 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2441 \begin_layout Itemize
2450 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2453 \begin_layout Itemize
2462 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2465 \begin_layout Itemize
2474 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2478 \begin_layout Labeling
2479 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2497 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2498 LatexCommand nomenclature
2500 description "Shift key"
2504 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2505 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2508 \begin_layout Labeling
2509 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2527 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2528 LatexCommand nomenclature
2530 description "Alt or Meta key"
2534 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2535 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2536 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2542 \begin_inset Newline newline
2545 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2547 menu accelerator keys
2550 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2551 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2555 \begin_layout Standard
2556 For example, the sequence
2557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2563 \begin_inset space ~
2567 \begin_inset space ~
2573 \begin_inset space ~
2581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2600 \begin_inset space ~
2606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2616 \begin_layout Standard
2621 manual lists all other things bound to the
2629 \begin_layout Standard
2630 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2632 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2633 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2634 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2635 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2636 The \SpecialChar LyX
2637 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2638 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2639 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2641 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2657 followed by a capital
2664 \begin_layout Chapter
2667 \begin_inset Index idx
2670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2680 \begin_layout Section
2682 \begin_inset Index idx
2685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2694 \begin_layout Subsection
2698 \begin_layout Standard
2699 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2700 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2701 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2702 numbering schemes, and so on.
2703 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2704 and format the title of your document differently.
2707 \begin_layout Standard
2712 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2713 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2714 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2715 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2716 picks one for you by default.
2717 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2720 \begin_layout Subsection
2722 \begin_inset Index idx
2725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2734 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2741 \begin_layout Standard
2742 You can select a class using the
2744 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2745 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2749 \begin_inset Index idx
2752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2759 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2763 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2767 \begin_layout Standard
2768 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2773 \begin_layout Description
2774 Article for basic articles
2777 \begin_layout Description
2778 Report for basic reports
2781 \begin_layout Description
2782 Book for writing a book
2785 \begin_layout Description
2786 Letter for US-style letters
2789 \begin_layout Standard
2790 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2791 only uses if you have installed
2792 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2793 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2794 distributions will include
2796 Here are some of the classes.
2797 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2799 Special Document Classes
2808 \begin_layout Description
2809 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2812 \begin_layout Description
2813 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2817 \begin_layout Description
2818 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2822 \begin_layout Description
2823 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2824 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2825 There are three article layouts available.
2826 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2827 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2828 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2829 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2834 sequential numbering
2835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2838 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2839 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2840 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2841 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2844 \begin_layout Description
2845 Beamer Layout for presentations
2848 \begin_layout Description
2849 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2850 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2851 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2852 with \SpecialChar LyX
2856 \begin_layout Description
2857 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2860 \begin_layout Description
2862 \begin_inset space ~
2865 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2868 \begin_layout Description
2869 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2872 \begin_layout Description
2873 Foils Used to make transparencies
2876 \begin_layout Description
2877 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2878 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2879 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2880 with \SpecialChar LyX
2884 \begin_layout Description
2885 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2886 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2889 \begin_layout Description
2890 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2893 \begin_layout Description
2894 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2897 \begin_layout Description
2898 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2899 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2900 (Is used by this document.)
2903 \begin_layout Description
2904 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2907 \begin_layout Description
2908 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2911 \begin_layout Description
2916 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2917 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2919 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2923 \begin_layout Description
2924 Slides Used to make transparencies
2927 \begin_layout Description
2929 \begin_inset space ~
2932 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2933 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2936 \begin_layout Description
2937 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2940 \begin_layout Standard
2941 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2943 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2949 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2950 of the document classes.
2953 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2957 \begin_layout Standard
2958 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2961 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2963 \begin_inset Index idx
2966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2983 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2984 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2986 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2989 \begin_layout Standard
2992 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2997 , are highly specialized.
2999 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3000 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3001 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3002 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3003 by some document class.
3004 There are just too many of them.
3005 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3008 \begin_layout Standard
3009 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3017 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3018 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3019 document class for a new file.
3021 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3026 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3035 manual for information on how to install them.
3036 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3042 \begin_layout Standard
3043 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3044 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3045 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3046 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3047 class files to be used for dissertation
3048 s submitted to those universities.
3049 The \SpecialChar LyX
3050 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3052 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3056 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3062 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3065 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3069 name "subsec:Modules"
3074 \begin_inset Index idx
3077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3086 \begin_layout Standard
3087 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3088 chosen document class.
3089 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3090 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3097 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3101 \begin_inset Index idx
3104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3111 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3115 \begin_layout Standard
3116 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3117 packages or file format converters that are not always
3118 installed by default.
3120 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3121 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3122 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3123 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3125 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3126 file without the missing prerequisites.
3127 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3128 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3131 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3135 \begin_inset Index idx
3138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3139 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3149 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3158 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3161 \begin_layout Standard
3162 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3170 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3172 will advise you about these things.
3180 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3182 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3184 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3189 \begin_inset Index idx
3192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3193 Document ! Local Layout
3201 \begin_layout Standard
3202 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3203 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3204 : They are intended to be used in
3205 a variety of different documents.
3206 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3207 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3208 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3209 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3210 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3212 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3230 manual for information on how to use it.
3233 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3237 \begin_layout Standard
3238 Each class has a default set of options.
3239 Here's a quick table describing them:
3242 \begin_layout Standard
3243 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3249 \begin_layout Standard
3251 \begin_inset Tabular
3252 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3253 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3254 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3255 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3256 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3257 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3258 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3712 \begin_layout Standard
3713 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3719 \begin_layout Standard
3720 You're probably also wondering what
3721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3725 \begin_inset space ~
3729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3733 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3734 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3739 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3744 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3754 headings, there are also
3762 headings, and so on.
3763 We will describe these headings fully in section
3764 \begin_inset space ~
3768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3770 reference "subsec:Headings"
3777 \begin_layout Subsection
3779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3781 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3786 \begin_inset Index idx
3789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3796 \begin_inset Index idx
3799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3808 \begin_layout Standard
3809 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3811 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3818 \begin_inset space ~
3826 \begin_inset space ~
3831 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3833 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3834 doesn't support special options you want to
3835 use for your document.
3836 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3837 -class and its options, you have to read
3841 \begin_layout Standard
3845 \begin_inset space ~
3852 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3858 \begin_inset space ~
3863 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3864 You can choose between the following five options:
3867 \begin_layout Labeling
3868 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3873 Use default page style of current class.
3876 \begin_layout Labeling
3877 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3882 No page numbers or headings.
3885 \begin_layout Labeling
3886 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3894 \begin_layout Labeling
3895 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3900 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3901 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3902 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3903 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3906 \begin_layout Labeling
3907 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3912 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3913 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3919 \begin_inset Index idx
3922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3924 -packages ! fancyhdr
3930 How they are defined is explained in section
3931 \begin_inset space ~
3935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3937 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3944 \begin_layout Standard
3945 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3946 \begin_inset space ~
3950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3952 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3959 \begin_layout Subsection
3960 Paper Size and Orientation
3961 \begin_inset Index idx
3964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3965 Document ! Paper size
3971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3973 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3980 \begin_layout Standard
3981 You can find the following options in the menu
3984 \begin_inset space ~
3991 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3995 \begin_inset Index idx
3998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4007 \begin_layout Labeling
4008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 \begin_inset space ~
4017 What size paper to print on.
4022 \begin_layout Itemize
4028 \begin_layout Itemize
4034 \begin_layout Itemize
4040 \begin_layout Itemize
4046 \begin_layout Itemize
4049 US letter, US legal, US executive
4052 \begin_layout Itemize
4058 \begin_layout Itemize
4065 \begin_layout Labeling
4066 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4071 To choose whether to output as
4082 \begin_layout Labeling
4083 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4087 \begin_inset space ~
4092 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4093 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4096 \begin_layout Subsection
4098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4100 name "subsec:Margins"
4105 \begin_inset Index idx
4108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4115 \begin_inset Index idx
4118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4127 \begin_layout Standard
4128 Paper margins are set in the menu
4130 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4134 \begin_inset Index idx
4137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4146 \begin_layout Standard
4147 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4148 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4149 the paper format and the font size into account.
4152 \begin_layout Subsection
4156 \begin_layout Standard
4157 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4163 That includes the paragraph environments.
4164 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4165 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4166 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4168 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4177 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4179 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4180 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4181 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4184 \begin_layout Section
4185 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4186 \begin_inset Index idx
4189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4190 Paragraph ! Indentation
4198 \begin_layout Subsection
4200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4202 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4209 \begin_layout Standard
4210 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4211 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4214 \begin_layout Standard
4215 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4216 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4217 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4218 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4222 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4228 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4229 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4230 language than English.
4232 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4235 \begin_layout Standard
4236 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4237 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4238 into \SpecialChar LyX
4240 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4243 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4245 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4246 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4247 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4254 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4255 goes to produce a printable file.
4260 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4262 gives you the ability globally to change
4266 these pre-coded spacings.
4267 We will explain more later.
4270 \begin_layout Subsection
4271 Paragraph Separation
4272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4274 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4279 \begin_inset Index idx
4282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4283 Paragraph ! Separation
4291 \begin_layout Standard
4299 \begin_inset space ~
4307 \begin_inset space ~
4314 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4318 \begin_inset Index idx
4321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4327 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4330 \begin_layout Subsection
4334 \begin_layout Standard
4335 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4338 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4340 \begin_inset space ~
4345 dialog and toggle the
4348 \begin_inset space ~
4353 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4356 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4360 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4361 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4365 \begin_layout Standard
4366 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4367 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4370 \begin_layout Subsection
4372 \begin_inset Index idx
4375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4376 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4384 \begin_layout Standard
4387 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4391 \begin_inset Index idx
4394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4403 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4407 \begin_inset space ~
4416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4417 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4423 \begin_inset Index idx
4426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4428 -packages ! setspace
4433 installed to use this feature.
4438 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4440 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4442 \begin_inset space ~
4447 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4448 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4451 \begin_layout Section
4452 Paragraph Environments
4453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4455 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4460 \begin_inset Index idx
4463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4464 Paragraph ! Environments
4470 \begin_inset Index idx
4473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4474 Paragraph environments|(
4482 \begin_layout Subsection
4486 \begin_layout Standard
4487 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4490 \begin_layout Standard
4509 \begin_inset Newline newline
4512 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4514 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4515 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4516 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4525 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4528 \begin_layout Standard
4529 A paragraph environment is simply a
4530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4537 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4538 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4539 scheme, labels, and so on.
4540 Additionally, you can
4541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4548 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4549 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4550 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4551 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4553 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4555 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4558 \begin_layout Standard
4559 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4560 \begin_inset Graphics
4561 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4567 at the left end of the toolbar.
4569 will change the environment of the
4573 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4574 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4575 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4579 \begin_layout Standard
4588 create a new paragraph using the
4592 paragraph environment.
4594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4601 because if you are in one of these environments:
4604 \begin_layout Itemize
4610 \begin_layout Itemize
4616 \begin_layout Itemize
4622 \begin_layout Itemize
4628 \begin_layout Itemize
4634 \begin_layout Itemize
4640 \begin_layout Itemize
4646 \begin_layout Standard
4648 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4652 , rather than resetting it to
4657 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4658 \begin_inset space ~
4662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4664 reference "sec:Nesting"
4671 \begin_layout Subsection
4675 \begin_layout Standard
4676 The default paragraph environment is
4681 It creates a plain paragraph.
4683 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4684 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4685 this manual) are in the
4692 \begin_layout Standard
4693 You can nest a paragraph using the
4697 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4705 \begin_layout Subsection
4707 \begin_inset Index idx
4710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4719 \begin_layout Standard
4720 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4721 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4730 for thanks or contact information.
4731 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4732 places all of this on a separate page
4733 along with today's date.
4734 For other types of documents, the title
4735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4742 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4746 \begin_layout Standard
4748 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4762 Here's how you use them:
4765 \begin_layout Itemize
4766 Put the title of your document in the
4773 \begin_layout Itemize
4774 Put the author name in the
4781 \begin_layout Itemize
4782 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4783 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4789 Note that using this environment is optional.
4790 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4791 will automatically insert today's date.
4792 If you don't want a date, use the option
4794 Suppress default date on front page
4798 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4799 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4801 \begin_inset space ~
4809 \begin_layout Standard
4810 You can use footnotes to insert
4811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4818 or contact information.
4821 \begin_layout Subsection
4823 \begin_inset Index idx
4826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4835 name "subsec:Headings"
4842 \begin_layout Standard
4843 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4845 takes care of the numbering for you.
4848 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4850 \begin_inset Index idx
4853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4854 Section headings ! Numbered
4862 \begin_layout Standard
4863 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4867 \begin_layout Enumerate
4873 \begin_layout Enumerate
4879 \begin_layout Enumerate
4885 \begin_layout Enumerate
4891 \begin_layout Enumerate
4897 \begin_layout Enumerate
4903 \begin_layout Enumerate
4909 \begin_layout Standard
4911 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4912 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4913 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4916 \begin_layout Standard
4917 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4918 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4919 You group the book into chapters.
4921 does a similar grouping:
4924 \begin_layout Itemize
4929 is divided into either
4940 \begin_layout Itemize
4952 \begin_layout Itemize
4964 \begin_layout Itemize
4976 \begin_layout Itemize
4988 \begin_layout Itemize
5000 \begin_layout Standard
5001 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5009 Not all document types use the
5013 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5018 is the top-level heading.
5026 \begin_layout Standard
5031 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5032 labels it with its number,
5033 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5035 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5047 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5049 \begin_inset Index idx
5052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5053 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5061 \begin_layout Standard
5062 The unnumbered section headings have a
5063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5070 at the end of their name.
5071 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5072 the table of contents, see section
5073 \begin_inset space ~
5077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5086 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5087 Changing the Numbering
5088 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5090 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5097 \begin_layout Standard
5098 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5099 in the Table of Contents.
5100 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5102 Just as certain classes start with
5116 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5126 This is something you can change.
5129 \begin_layout Standard
5132 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5136 \begin_inset Index idx
5139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5148 \begin_inset space ~
5152 \begin_inset space ~
5157 you will see two counters.
5162 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5163 numbers a section heading.
5164 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5168 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5169 Short Titles of Headings
5170 \begin_inset Index idx
5173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5174 Section headings ! Short titles
5180 \begin_inset Argument 1
5183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5190 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5192 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5199 \begin_layout Standard
5200 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5201 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5202 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5203 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5206 \begin_layout Standard
5208 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5209 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5210 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5211 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5216 \begin_inset space ~
5222 This will insert a box labeled
5223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5227 \begin_inset space ~
5231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5234 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5235 This also works for captions inside floats.
5236 There can only be one short title per title.
5239 \begin_layout Standard
5240 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5243 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5247 \begin_layout Standard
5248 The following information applies to all section headings:
5251 \begin_layout Itemize
5252 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5255 \begin_layout Itemize
5256 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5259 \begin_layout Itemize
5260 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5263 \begin_layout Itemize
5264 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5267 \begin_layout Subsection
5271 \begin_layout Standard
5273 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5287 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5288 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5289 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5290 the text they contain.
5291 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5299 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5302 \begin_layout Standard
5303 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5312 when you start a new paragraph.
5313 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5317 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5318 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5319 have to change back to the
5323 environment yourself.
5326 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5335 \begin_inset Index idx
5338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5347 \begin_layout Standard
5348 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5349 time for the differences.
5358 are identical except for one difference:
5362 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5371 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5374 \begin_layout Standard
5375 Here's an example of the
5388 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5390 See – no indentation!
5394 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5395 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5396 the other paragraph.
5399 \begin_layout Standard
5400 Here's another example, this time in the
5407 \begin_layout Quotation
5413 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5414 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5415 the first line, then
5419 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5423 you were quoting other text.
5426 \begin_layout Quotation
5427 Here's a new paragraph.
5428 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5429 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5432 \begin_layout Standard
5433 As the examples show,
5437 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5438 They should put quotes in the
5443 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5447 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5450 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5452 \begin_inset Index idx
5455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5462 \begin_inset Index idx
5465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5481 \begin_layout Standard
5486 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5492 \begin_inset Newline newline
5495 Which I did not rehearse!
5499 It could be much worse.
5500 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5502 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5503 indented a bit more than the first.
5504 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5510 \begin_inset Newline newline
5513 And make things look fine
5514 \begin_inset Newline newline
5520 arg "newline-insert newline"
5526 \begin_layout Standard
5531 does not indent both margins.
5532 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5533 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5536 arg "newline-insert newline"
5542 \begin_layout Subsection
5544 \begin_inset Index idx
5547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5563 \begin_layout Standard
5565 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5575 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5576 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5585 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5586 lets you provide your own label.
5587 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5588 describing some general features of all four of them.
5591 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5595 \begin_layout Standard
5596 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5598 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5599 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5608 reset the environment to
5612 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5613 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5614 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5618 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5622 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5629 \begin_layout Standard
5630 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5631 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5632 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5634 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5635 you read all of section
5636 \begin_inset space ~
5640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5642 reference "sec:Nesting"
5649 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5651 \begin_inset Index idx
5654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5661 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5670 \begin_layout Standard
5671 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5675 paragraph environment.
5676 It has the following properties:
5679 \begin_layout Itemize
5680 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5684 \begin_layout Itemize
5686 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5689 \begin_layout Itemize
5690 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5694 \begin_layout Itemize
5695 The items can have any length.
5697 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5698 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5705 \begin_layout Itemize
5710 environment inside another
5714 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5718 \begin_layout Itemize
5719 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5722 \begin_layout Itemize
5724 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5727 \begin_layout Itemize
5729 \begin_inset space ~
5733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5735 reference "sec:Nesting"
5739 for a full explanation of nesting.
5743 \begin_layout Standard
5744 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5753 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5756 \begin_layout Standard
5757 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5758 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5761 \begin_layout Itemize
5762 The label for the first level
5766 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5770 \begin_layout Itemize
5771 The label for the second level is a dash.
5775 \begin_layout Itemize
5776 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5780 \begin_layout Itemize
5781 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5785 \begin_layout Itemize
5786 Back out to the third level.
5790 \begin_layout Itemize
5791 Back to the second level.
5795 \begin_layout Itemize
5796 Back to the outermost level.
5799 \begin_layout Standard
5800 These are the default labels for an
5805 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5807 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5810 dialog in the submenu
5815 \begin_inset Index idx
5818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5824 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5828 \begin_layout Standard
5829 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5830 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5832 \begin_inset space ~
5836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5838 reference "sec:Nesting"
5845 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5847 \begin_inset Index idx
5850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5859 name "sec:Enumerate"
5866 \begin_layout Standard
5871 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5872 It has these properties:
5875 \begin_layout Enumerate
5876 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5880 \begin_layout Enumerate
5881 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5885 \begin_layout Enumerate
5887 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5890 \begin_layout Enumerate
5895 environment resets the counter to one.
5898 \begin_layout Enumerate
5911 \begin_layout Enumerate
5912 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5913 Items can have any length.
5916 \begin_layout Enumerate
5917 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5920 \begin_layout Enumerate
5921 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5924 \begin_layout Enumerate
5925 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5929 \begin_layout Standard
5938 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5940 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5941 labels the four different levels in an
5948 \begin_layout Enumerate
5949 The first level of an
5953 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5957 \begin_layout Enumerate
5958 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5962 \begin_layout Enumerate
5963 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5967 \begin_layout Enumerate
5968 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5971 \begin_layout Enumerate
5972 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5977 \begin_layout Enumerate
5978 Back to the third level
5982 \begin_layout Enumerate
5983 Back to the second level.
5987 \begin_layout Enumerate
5988 Back to the outermost level.
5991 \begin_layout Standard
5992 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5996 environment, see section
5997 \begin_inset space ~
6001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6003 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6008 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6012 \begin_layout Standard
6013 There is more to nesting
6017 environments than we've stated here.
6018 You should read section
6019 \begin_inset space ~
6023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6025 reference "sec:Nesting"
6029 to learn more about nesting.
6032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6034 \begin_inset Index idx
6037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6046 \begin_layout Standard
6047 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6051 list has no fixed label.
6052 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6061 of the first line as the label.
6065 \begin_layout Description
6066 Example: This is an example of the
6073 \begin_layout Standard
6075 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6079 \begin_layout Standard
6081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6088 it is meant that the first usage of the
6092 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6094 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6102 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6107 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6108 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6110 \begin_inset space ~
6116 \begin_inset space ~
6120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6122 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6126 for more information.) Here is an example:
6129 \begin_layout Description
6131 \begin_inset space ~
6134 Example: This one shows how to use a
6137 \begin_inset space ~
6149 \begin_layout Description
6150 Usage: You should use the
6154 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6155 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6157 It's not a good idea to use a
6161 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6162 You're better off using
6174 paragraphs into them.
6177 \begin_layout Description
6178 Nesting: You can nest
6182 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6186 \begin_layout Standard
6187 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6188 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6189 them from the first line.
6192 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6194 \begin_inset Index idx
6197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6206 \begin_layout Standard
6211 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6212 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6216 \begin_layout Standard
6225 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6227 Here are its properties:
6230 \begin_layout Labeling
6231 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6233 \begin_inset space ~
6236 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6245 of each line as the item label.
6250 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6251 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6252 space as described above.
6255 \begin_layout Labeling
6256 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6257 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6258 uses different margins for the item label and the
6259 body of the item text.
6260 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6261 label width plus a little extra space.
6265 \begin_layout Labeling
6266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6268 \begin_inset space ~
6271 width \SpecialChar LyX
6272 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6273 If the label width is larger, the label
6274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6281 into the first line.
6282 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6283 margin of the rest of the item text.
6286 \begin_layout Labeling
6287 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6289 \begin_inset space ~
6292 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6297 environment has the same left margin.
6298 \begin_inset Newline newline
6301 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6304 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6306 \begin_inset space ~
6311 dialog (toolbar button
6314 arg "layout-paragraph"
6321 \begin_inset space ~
6326 determines the default label width.
6327 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6336 multiple times instead.
6337 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6347 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6350 \begin_inset space ~
6355 every time you alter a label in a
6360 \begin_inset Newline newline
6363 The predefined default width is the length of
6364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6372 \begin_inset space ~
6378 \begin_layout Standard
6383 list the same way as the
6387 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6393 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6397 \begin_layout Standard
6402 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6403 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6405 \begin_inset space ~
6409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6411 reference "sec:Nesting"
6415 to learn about nesting.
6418 \begin_layout Standard
6419 There is yet another feature of the
6423 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6424 left-justifies the item labels by
6426 You can use additional
6430 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6431 justifies the item label.
6436 are documented in section
6437 \begin_inset space ~
6441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6443 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6448 Here are some examples:
6451 \begin_layout Labeling
6452 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6453 Left The default for
6460 \begin_layout Labeling
6461 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6462 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6469 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6472 \begin_layout Labeling
6473 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6474 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6478 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6485 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6488 \begin_layout Subsection
6490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6492 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6497 \begin_inset Index idx
6500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6509 \begin_layout Standard
6510 The features described in this section require that the module
6512 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6514 is loaded in the document settings.
6515 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6521 \begin_inset Index idx
6524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6526 -packages ! enumitem
6534 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6535 Custom Enumerate Lists
6536 \begin_inset Index idx
6539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6540 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6548 \begin_layout Standard
6550 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6553 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6556 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6557 There you add the command
6560 \begin_layout Standard
6568 \begin_layout Standard
6580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6581 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6582 Code, look at section
6583 \begin_inset space ~
6587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6589 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6602 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6609 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6610 For capital Roman numerals replace
6622 in the command above.
6623 For Arabic numerals use
6631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6638 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6653 \begin_layout Standard
6655 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6663 You can only number 26
6664 \begin_inset space ~
6667 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6675 \begin_layout Standard
6676 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6677 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6680 \begin_layout Standard
6681 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6684 \begin_layout Enumerate
6685 \begin_inset Argument 1
6688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6714 \begin_layout Enumerate
6715 \begin_inset Argument 1
6718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6741 \begin_layout Enumerate
6746 \begin_layout Enumerate
6747 \begin_inset Argument 1
6750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6774 \begin_layout Enumerate
6775 \begin_inset Argument 1
6778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6804 \begin_layout Standard
6805 For this list these commands were used:
6808 \begin_layout Standard
6819 \begin_inset Newline newline
6827 \begin_inset Newline newline
6835 \begin_inset Newline newline
6845 \begin_layout Standard
6852 makes the label emphasized and
6861 \begin_layout Standard
6862 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6870 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6871 lists until you change the definition.
6879 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6881 \begin_inset Index idx
6884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6885 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6893 \begin_layout Standard
6894 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6897 \begin_layout Enumerate
6898 \begin_inset Argument 1
6901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6920 \begin_inset Note Note
6923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6924 goes back to default numbering
6932 \begin_layout Enumerate
6936 \begin_layout Standard
6940 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6944 \begin_layout Standard
6945 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6950 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
6951 to indicate that it is a resumed
6952 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
6953 , but in the output.
6956 \begin_layout Standard
6957 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6965 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
6974 \begin_layout Standard
6975 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6977 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6978 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6979 of a normal enumeration.
6980 There, insert the command
6983 \begin_layout Standard
6989 \begin_layout Standard
6994 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6998 \begin_layout Enumerate
7002 \begin_layout Enumerate
7006 \begin_layout Standard
7007 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7010 \begin_layout Enumerate
7011 \begin_inset Argument 1
7014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7030 This enumeration starts at 4
7033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7035 \begin_inset Index idx
7038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7047 \begin_layout Standard
7048 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7050 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7053 \begin_layout Itemize
7057 \begin_layout Itemize
7058 with standard spacing
7061 \begin_layout Standard
7062 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7064 Add there the command
7068 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7071 \begin_layout Itemize
7072 \begin_inset Argument 1
7075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7094 \begin_layout Itemize
7098 \begin_layout Itemize
7102 \begin_layout Standard
7103 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7110 \begin_inset Index idx
7113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7115 -packages ! enumitem
7121 For more information see its documentation,
7122 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7131 \begin_layout Standard
7132 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7134 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7135 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7139 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7142 \begin_layout Enumerate
7143 \begin_inset Argument 1
7146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7154 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7167 \begin_layout Enumerate
7168 with negative indentation
7171 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7172 Further Customization
7173 \begin_inset Index idx
7176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7177 Lists ! Customization
7185 \begin_layout Standard
7186 You can also change the style of description lists.
7190 \begin_layout Standard
7196 \begin_layout Standard
7197 changes the description label font, the command
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7206 \begin_layout Standard
7207 sets the list style.
7210 \begin_layout Standard
7211 An example where the command
7214 \begin_layout Standard
7219 itshape, style=nextline
7222 \begin_layout Standard
7226 \begin_layout Description
7228 \begin_inset space ~
7232 \begin_inset Argument 1
7235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7241 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7243 itshape, style=nextline
7253 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7254 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7258 \begin_layout Description
7260 \begin_inset space ~
7263 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7264 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7265 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7268 \begin_layout Standard
7269 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7275 \begin_inset Index idx
7278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7280 -packages ! enumitem
7286 For more information see its documentation
7287 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7296 \begin_layout Subsection
7298 \begin_inset Index idx
7301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7312 \begin_inset space ~
7315 Address: An Overview
7318 \begin_layout Standard
7319 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7320 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7328 \begin_inset space ~
7334 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7335 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7336 gags on the document.
7337 In contrast, you can use the
7344 \begin_inset space ~
7349 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7350 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7354 \begin_layout Standard
7355 Of course, you're not limited to using
7362 \begin_inset space ~
7371 \begin_inset space ~
7376 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7377 some European academic papers.
7380 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7384 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7391 \begin_layout Standard
7396 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7397 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7401 \begin_inset space ~
7406 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7407 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7408 Here's an example of each:
7411 \begin_layout Right Address
7413 \begin_inset Newline newline
7417 \begin_inset Newline newline
7421 \begin_inset Newline newline
7424 When is it? What is today?
7427 \begin_layout Standard
7431 \begin_inset space ~
7437 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7439 the largest block of text on a single line.
7440 Here's an example of the
7447 \begin_layout Address
7449 \begin_inset Newline newline
7452 Where do I send this
7453 \begin_inset Newline newline
7456 Your post office and country
7459 \begin_layout Standard
7460 As you can see, both
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7472 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7477 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7478 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7484 This makes sense, since
7492 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7493 Thus, you have to use
7500 arg "newline-insert newline"
7505 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7506 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7508 \begin_inset space ~
7512 \begin_inset space ~
7517 ) to start a new line in an
7524 \begin_inset space ~
7532 \begin_layout Subsection
7536 \begin_layout Standard
7537 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7538 or list of references.
7540 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7543 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7545 \begin_inset Index idx
7548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7557 \begin_layout Standard
7562 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7563 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7564 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7565 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7579 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7580 The book document classes ignores the
7584 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7588 in a letter document class.
7591 \begin_layout Standard
7596 environment does several things for you.
7597 First, it puts the centered label
7598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7606 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7608 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7609 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7610 the subsequent text.
7611 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7613 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7617 \begin_layout Standard
7618 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7622 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7623 The new paragraph will still be in the
7628 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7629 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7632 \begin_layout Standard
7633 \begin_inset Float figure
7638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7640 \begin_inset Graphics
7641 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7649 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7652 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7654 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7675 \begin_layout Standard
7676 We would love to demonstrate the
7680 environment, but since this document is in the
7681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7688 class, we can't do this.
7689 We inserted it therefore as figure
7690 \begin_inset space ~
7694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7696 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7701 If you have never heard of an
7702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7709 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7712 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7714 \begin_inset Index idx
7717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7726 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7733 \begin_layout Standard
7738 environment is used to list references.
7739 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7740 only use it at the end of the document.
7752 \begin_layout Standard
7753 When you first open a
7757 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7758 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7774 depending on the document class.
7775 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7776 Each paragraph of the
7780 environment is a bibliography entry.
7785 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7786 Each new paragraph is still in the
7793 \begin_layout Standard
7794 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7795 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7797 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7799 handling, have a look at section
7800 \begin_inset space ~
7804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7806 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7813 \begin_layout Subsection
7814 Special Environments
7817 \begin_layout Standard
7819 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7820 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7823 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7828 \begin_inset Index idx
7831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7839 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7841 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7848 \begin_layout Standard
7854 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7856 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7861 key as a fixed whitespace.
7865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7878 \begin_inset space ~
7883 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7897 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7900 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7903 arg "newline-insert newline"
7920 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7921 So, when you finish using the
7926 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7927 Also, you can nest the
7932 environment inside of others.
7935 \begin_layout Standard
7936 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7939 \begin_layout Itemize
7943 arg "newline-insert newline"
7946 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7951 \begin_inset space \space{}
7961 arg "newline-insert newline"
7967 \begin_layout Itemize
7971 arg "newline-insert newline"
7981 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7987 \begin_layout Itemize
7988 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7989 You must put at least one
7993 in any line you want blank.
7994 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
7998 \begin_layout Itemize
7999 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8003 since that will insert
8008 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8011 arg "self-insert \""
8017 \begin_layout Standard
8021 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8025 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8029 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8033 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8037 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8038 printf("Hello World!
8043 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8047 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8051 \begin_layout Standard
8052 This is just the standard
8053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8064 \begin_layout Standard
8070 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8072 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8073 as if you used a typewriter.
8074 \begin_inset Index idx
8077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8078 Paragraph environments|)
8083 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8086 Program Code Listings
8091 \begin_inset space ~
8099 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8103 \begin_inset Index idx
8106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8115 \begin_layout Standard
8120 environment is similar to the
8125 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8126 computer console text.
8131 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8145 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8146 you can have empty lines.
8159 \begin_layout Itemize
8160 have a certain language and a text style
8163 \begin_layout Itemize
8164 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8165 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8166 and \SpecialChar TeX
8170 \begin_layout Standard
8171 Because of these properties
8175 works like a typewriter.
8179 \begin_layout Verbatim
8183 \begin_layout Verbatim
8186 The following 2 lines are empty:
8189 \begin_layout Verbatim
8193 \begin_layout Verbatim
8197 \begin_layout Verbatim
8198 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8203 \begin_layout Section
8204 Nesting Environments
8205 \begin_inset Index idx
8208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8209 Nesting ! Environments
8215 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8224 \begin_layout Subsection
8228 \begin_layout Standard
8230 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8232 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8234 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8236 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8248 \begin_layout Enumerate
8252 \begin_layout Enumerate
8257 \begin_layout Enumerate
8261 \begin_layout Enumerate
8266 \begin_layout Enumerate
8270 \begin_layout Standard
8271 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8272 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8274 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8276 \begin_inset space ~
8280 \begin_inset space ~
8288 \begin_inset space ~
8292 \begin_inset space ~
8297 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8299 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8302 arg "depth-increment"
8308 arg "depth-decrement"
8322 arg "depth-increment"
8328 arg "depth-decrement"
8332 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8333 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8337 \begin_layout Standard
8338 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8339 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8340 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8341 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8342 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8345 \begin_layout Standard
8346 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8348 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8350 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8353 \begin_layout Subsection
8354 What You Can and Can't Nest
8357 \begin_layout Standard
8358 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8359 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8362 \begin_layout Standard
8363 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8364 than a simple yes or no.
8365 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8368 \begin_layout Itemize
8369 Completely unnestable
8372 \begin_layout Itemize
8373 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8377 \begin_layout Itemize
8378 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8382 \begin_layout Standard
8383 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8384 environments have them:
8387 \begin_layout Description
8388 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8389 Can't nest into them.
8393 \begin_layout Itemize
8399 \begin_layout Itemize
8405 \begin_layout Itemize
8411 \begin_layout Itemize
8417 \begin_layout Itemize
8424 \begin_layout Description
8426 \begin_inset space ~
8429 Nestable You can nest them.
8430 You can nest other things into them.
8434 \begin_layout Itemize
8440 \begin_layout Itemize
8446 \begin_layout Itemize
8452 \begin_layout Itemize
8458 \begin_layout Itemize
8464 \begin_layout Itemize
8470 \begin_layout Itemize
8476 \begin_layout Itemize
8483 \begin_layout Itemize
8490 \begin_layout Description
8491 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8492 You can't nest anything into them.
8496 \begin_layout Itemize
8502 \begin_layout Itemize
8508 \begin_layout Itemize
8514 \begin_layout Itemize
8520 \begin_layout Itemize
8526 \begin_layout Itemize
8532 \begin_layout Itemize
8538 \begin_layout Itemize
8544 \begin_layout Itemize
8550 \begin_layout Itemize
8556 \begin_layout Itemize
8562 \begin_layout Itemize
8568 \begin_layout Itemize
8574 \begin_layout Itemize
8578 \begin_inset space ~
8584 \begin_layout Itemize
8591 \begin_layout Standard
8592 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8600 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8610 \begin_inset space ~
8613 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8614 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8615 nested section headings violate this.
8623 \begin_layout Subsection
8624 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8625 \begin_inset Index idx
8628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8629 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8637 \begin_layout Standard
8638 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8639 affected by nesting anyhow.
8643 \begin_layout Itemize
8647 \begin_layout Itemize
8651 \begin_layout Itemize
8655 \begin_layout Standard
8657 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8665 Figures and tables in
8669 are not affected by this.
8674 Have a look at section
8675 \begin_inset space ~
8679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8681 reference "sec:Floats"
8685 for more information about
8692 \begin_layout Standard
8694 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8695 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8699 \begin_layout Standard
8700 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8708 of its own, it behaves just like a
8709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8716 paragraph environment.
8717 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8721 \begin_layout Standard
8722 Here's an example with a table:
8725 \begin_layout Enumerate
8730 \begin_layout Enumerate
8731 This is (a) and it's nested.
8735 \begin_layout Standard
8736 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8742 \begin_layout Standard
8744 \begin_inset Tabular
8745 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8746 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8747 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8748 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8832 \begin_layout Standard
8833 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8840 \begin_layout Enumerate
8842 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8846 \begin_layout Enumerate
8850 \begin_layout Standard
8851 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8854 \begin_layout Enumerate
8859 \begin_layout Enumerate
8860 This is (a) and it's nested.
8864 \begin_layout Standard
8865 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8871 \begin_layout Standard
8873 \begin_inset Tabular
8874 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8875 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8876 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8877 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8961 \begin_layout Standard
8962 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8968 \begin_layout Enumerate
8975 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8978 \begin_layout Enumerate
8982 \begin_layout Standard
8983 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8987 \begin_layout Standard
8988 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8991 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8994 \begin_layout Enumerate
8999 \begin_layout Enumerate
9000 This is (a) and it's nested.
9003 \begin_layout Standard
9004 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9010 \begin_layout Standard
9012 \begin_inset Tabular
9013 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9014 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9015 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9016 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9101 \begin_layout Standard
9102 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9108 \begin_layout Enumerate
9110 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9117 \begin_layout Enumerate
9121 \begin_layout Standard
9122 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9128 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9129 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9133 \begin_layout Subsection
9134 Usage and General Features
9137 \begin_layout Standard
9138 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9139 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9148 is the innermost possible depth.
9149 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9152 \begin_layout Enumerate
9153 level #1 – outermost
9157 \begin_layout Enumerate
9162 \begin_layout Enumerate
9167 \begin_layout Enumerate
9172 \begin_layout Itemize
9177 \begin_layout Itemize
9186 \begin_layout Standard
9187 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9188 both of them in the example.
9189 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9199 For example, if we tried to nest another
9204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9211 , we would get errors.
9214 \begin_layout Subsection
9216 \begin_inset Index idx
9219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9228 \begin_layout Standard
9229 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9230 We have several examples of nested environments.
9231 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9235 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9236 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9239 \begin_layout Labeling
9240 \labelwidthstring MMM
9241 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9250 \begin_layout Labeling
9251 \labelwidthstring MMM
9252 #2-a This is level #2.
9253 We created it by using
9256 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9262 arg "depth-increment"
9269 \begin_layout Labeling
9270 \labelwidthstring MMM
9271 #3-a This is level #3.
9272 This time, we just enter
9279 arg "depth-increment"
9283 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9287 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9293 arg "depth-increment"
9300 \begin_layout Standard
9305 environment, nested inside of
9306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9314 So, it's at level #4.
9315 We did this by entering
9318 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9324 arg "depth-increment"
9327 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9332 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9348 \begin_layout Standard
9353 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9356 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9362 \begin_layout Labeling
9363 \labelwidthstring MMM
9364 #4-a This is level #4.
9368 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9371 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9376 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9380 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9385 keep nesting things inside
9386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9397 \begin_layout Labeling
9398 \labelwidthstring MMM
9399 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9404 \begin_layout Labeling
9405 \labelwidthstring MMM
9406 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9407 and this is level #6.
9408 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9412 \begin_layout Labeling
9413 \labelwidthstring MMM
9414 #5-b Back to level #5.
9418 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9424 arg "depth-decrement"
9431 \begin_layout Labeling
9432 \labelwidthstring MMM
9436 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9442 arg "depth-decrement"
9445 , we're back at level #4.
9449 \begin_layout Labeling
9450 \labelwidthstring MMM
9451 #3-b Back to level #3.
9452 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9456 \begin_layout Labeling
9457 \labelwidthstring MMM
9458 #2-b Back to level #2.
9463 \begin_layout Labeling
9464 \labelwidthstring MMM
9465 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9466 After this sentence, we will enter
9470 and change the paragraph environment back to
9477 \begin_layout Standard
9478 We could have also used the
9494 environment in place of the
9499 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9502 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9503 Example 2: Inheritance
9506 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9507 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9510 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9519 arg "depth-increment"
9523 \begin_inset Newline newline
9526 which, we will change to the
9534 \begin_layout Enumerate
9539 environment, at level #2.
9542 \begin_layout Enumerate
9543 Notice how the nested
9547 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9551 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9555 \begin_layout Standard
9556 We ended this example by entering
9561 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9565 and reset the nesting depth by using
9568 arg "depth-decrement"
9574 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9575 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9584 \begin_inset Argument 1
9587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9588 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9596 \begin_layout Enumerate
9597 This is level #1, in an
9601 paragraph environment.
9602 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9606 \begin_layout Enumerate
9611 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9617 arg "depth-increment"
9621 Now, what happens if we nest an
9625 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9626 label be? An asterisk?
9630 \begin_layout Itemize
9640 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9641 So, its label is a bullet.
9642 (We got here by using
9645 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9651 arg "depth-increment"
9654 , then changing the environment to
9662 \begin_layout Itemize
9663 Here's level #4, produced using
9666 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9672 arg "depth-increment"
9676 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9681 \begin_layout Enumerate
9684 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9689 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9693 , because we are in the
9701 environment (that is, it is an
9716 \begin_layout Enumerate
9721 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9722 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9726 \begin_layout Enumerate
9727 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9730 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9733 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9736 \begin_layout Enumerate
9740 arg "depth-decrement"
9743 to decrease the depth after the next
9746 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9753 \begin_layout Enumerate
9755 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9760 \begin_layout Enumerate
9762 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9763 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9767 \begin_layout Enumerate
9768 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9777 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9782 reset the counter for the label.
9786 \begin_layout Enumerate
9790 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9796 arg "depth-decrement"
9799 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9800 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9801 into the twofold-nested
9809 \begin_layout Enumerate
9810 The same thing happens if we do another
9813 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9819 arg "depth-decrement"
9822 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9825 \begin_layout Standard
9826 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9831 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9846 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9853 The same rule applies for the
9857 environment, as well.
9860 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9861 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9864 \begin_layout Enumerate
9865 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9866 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9867 the same detail with how we did it.
9876 \begin_layout Standard
9884 arg "depth-increment"
9891 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9892 the example in parentheses someplace.
9893 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9894 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9895 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9899 \begin_layout Enumerate
9904 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9909 Now we will add verse.
9910 \begin_inset Newline newline
9913 It will get much worse.
9914 \begin_inset Newline newline
9924 arg "depth-increment"
9935 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9936 \begin_inset Newline newline
9939 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9940 \begin_inset Newline newline
9946 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9959 \begin_layout Standard
9960 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9966 \begin_layout Standard
9968 \begin_inset Tabular
9969 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9970 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9971 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9972 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10057 \begin_layout Verse
10061 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10071 arg "depth-increment"
10077 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10083 \begin_inset Newline newline
10091 arg "depth-decrement"
10098 \begin_layout Enumerate
10103 : level #1) This is another item.
10104 Note that selecting a
10108 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10109 3 times to put the table inside the
10117 \begin_layout Quotation
10118 We're now ending the
10122 list and changing to
10127 We're still at level #1.
10128 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10129 The next set of paragraphs is a
10130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10137 We will nest both the
10144 \begin_inset space ~
10149 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10153 for the letter body.
10157 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10160 to preserve the depth.
10161 Remember that you need to use
10164 arg "newline-insert newline"
10167 to create multiple lines inside the
10174 \begin_inset space ~
10184 \begin_layout Right Address
10186 \begin_inset Newline newline
10189 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10190 \begin_inset Newline newline
10196 \begin_layout Address
10198 \begin_inset space ~
10204 \begin_layout Quotation
10205 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10209 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10210 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10211 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10212 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10213 as soon as possible.
10214 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10217 \begin_layout Quotation
10218 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10219 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10220 with your order, along with payment.
10223 \begin_layout Quotation
10224 We thank you again for your patience.
10227 \begin_layout Address
10229 \begin_inset Newline newline
10236 \begin_layout Quotation
10237 That ends that example!
10240 \begin_layout Standard
10241 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10242 gives you a lot of power with just
10244 We could have easily nested an
10265 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10268 \begin_layout Subsection
10270 \begin_inset Index idx
10273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10274 Nesting ! Separation
10280 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10282 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10289 \begin_layout Standard
10290 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10292 For example you need two different enumerations:
10295 \begin_layout Enumerate
10300 \begin_layout Enumerate
10305 \begin_layout Enumerate
10309 \begin_layout Standard
10310 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10316 \begin_layout Itemize
10322 \begin_layout Standard
10323 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10329 \begin_layout Enumerate
10333 \begin_layout Enumerate
10337 \begin_layout Enumerate
10341 \begin_layout Standard
10342 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10343 list item and use the menu
10345 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10346 Start New Environment
10349 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10351 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10354 arg "paragraph-break"
10358 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10359 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10360 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10361 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10364 \begin_layout Standard
10365 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10368 arg "paragraph-break"
10371 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10374 \begin_layout Section
10375 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10376 \begin_inset Index idx
10379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10388 \begin_layout Standard
10389 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10390 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10392 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10393 be broken at the end of a line.
10394 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10398 \begin_layout Subsection
10400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10402 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10407 \begin_inset Index idx
10410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10419 \begin_layout Standard
10420 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10421 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10422 ) not to break the line at
10424 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10427 \begin_layout Quote
10428 Further documentation is given in section
10429 \begin_inset Newline newline
10433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10435 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10443 \begin_layout Standard
10444 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10459 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10468 A protected space is set with
10470 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10471 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10473 \begin_inset space ~
10481 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10487 \begin_layout Subsection
10489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10491 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10496 \begin_inset Index idx
10499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10500 Spacing ! Horizontal
10508 \begin_layout Standard
10509 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10511 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10512 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10516 The length units are listed in Appendix
10517 \begin_inset space ~
10521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10523 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10534 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10539 \begin_inset Index idx
10542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10543 Spaces ! Inter-word
10551 \begin_layout Standard
10552 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10553 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10554 at the ends of sentences.
10555 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10556 automatically takes care about this.
10557 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10558 followed by a period; see section
10559 \begin_inset space ~
10563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10565 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10570 To insert a normal space, select
10572 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10573 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10575 \begin_inset space ~
10583 arg "space-insert normal"
10589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10593 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10598 \begin_inset Index idx
10601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10610 \begin_layout Standard
10612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10619 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10628 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10629 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10630 inside abbreviations:
10633 \begin_layout Quote
10635 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10639 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10642 \begin_layout Standard
10643 or between values and units.
10644 Compare for example this:
10645 \begin_inset Newline newline
10649 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10653 \begin_inset Newline newline
10656 10 kg (normal space
10659 \begin_layout Standard
10660 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10663 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10665 \begin_inset space ~
10673 arg "space-insert thin"
10679 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10683 \begin_layout Standard
10684 You can also insert the following space types:
10687 \begin_layout Description
10689 \begin_inset space ~
10693 \begin_inset space ~
10696 space A line with a
10697 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10701 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10705 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10708 negative thin space between the arrows.
10711 \begin_layout Description
10713 \begin_inset space ~
10717 \begin_inset space ~
10720 space A line with a
10721 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10725 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10729 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10732 negative medium space between the arrows.
10735 \begin_layout Description
10737 \begin_inset space ~
10741 \begin_inset space ~
10744 space A line with a
10745 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10749 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10753 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10756 negative thick space between the arrows.
10759 \begin_layout Description
10761 \begin_inset space ~
10765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10769 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10773 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10777 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10781 \begin_inset space ~
10785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10788 em) space between the arrows.
10791 \begin_layout Description
10793 \begin_inset space ~
10797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10801 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10805 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10809 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10813 \begin_inset space ~
10817 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10820 em) space between the arrows.
10823 \begin_layout Description
10825 \begin_inset space ~
10829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10833 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10837 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10841 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10845 \begin_inset space ~
10849 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10852 em) space between the arrows.
10855 \begin_layout Description
10857 \begin_inset space ~
10861 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10865 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10870 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10874 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10877 cm space between the arrows.
10880 \begin_layout Standard
10882 \begin_inset space ~
10886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10888 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10892 lists the different space sizes.
10895 \begin_layout Standard
10896 \begin_inset Float table
10901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10902 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10907 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10911 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10921 \begin_inset Tabular
10922 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10923 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10924 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10925 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11013 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11041 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11198 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11200 \begin_inset Index idx
11203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11212 \begin_layout Standard
11213 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11214 feature for adding extra space
11215 in a uniform fashion.
11216 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11217 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11218 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11219 equally between themselves.
11222 \begin_layout Standard
11223 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11226 \begin_layout Quote
11228 This is on the left side
11229 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11232 This is on the right
11235 \begin_layout Quote
11238 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11242 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11248 \begin_layout Quote
11251 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11255 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11259 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11265 \begin_layout Standard
11266 That was an example in the
11272 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11276 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11280 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11283 is one in a standard paragraph.
11284 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11288 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11291 \begin_layout Standard
11292 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11295 \begin_inset space ~
11300 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11303 \begin_layout Standard
11305 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11309 \begin_inset space ~
11315 \begin_layout Standard
11317 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11321 \begin_inset space ~
11327 \begin_layout Standard
11329 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11333 \begin_inset space ~
11339 \begin_layout Standard
11341 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11345 \begin_inset space ~
11351 \begin_layout Standard
11353 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11357 \begin_inset space ~
11363 \begin_layout Standard
11365 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11369 \begin_inset space ~
11375 \begin_layout Standard
11376 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11384 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11388 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11390 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11391 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11395 option in the space dialog.
11403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11407 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11412 \begin_inset Index idx
11415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11424 \begin_layout Standard
11425 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11426 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11429 \begin_layout Standard
11430 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11433 What is correct English?:
11434 \begin_inset Newline newline
11438 \begin_inset Newline newline
11442 \begin_inset space ~
11445 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11446 \begin_inset Newline newline
11450 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11461 \begin_inset Newline newline
11465 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11476 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11482 \begin_layout Standard
11484 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11489 \begin_inset space ~
11493 \begin_inset space ~
11497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11501 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11503 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11504 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11508 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11514 \begin_inset space ~
11518 \begin_inset space ~
11522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11525 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11534 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11535 That is why it is named
11536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11544 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11545 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11549 \begin_layout Subsection
11551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11553 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11558 \begin_inset Index idx
11561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11570 \begin_layout Standard
11571 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11573 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11574 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11576 \begin_inset space ~
11582 There you find the following sizes:
11585 \begin_layout Standard
11598 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11599 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11604 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11606 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11607 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11609 \begin_inset space ~
11615 \begin_inset Index idx
11618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11619 Document ! Settings
11624 for the paragraph separation.
11625 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11636 \begin_layout Standard
11642 \begin_inset Index idx
11645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11651 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11652 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11657 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11658 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11667 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11676 s are described in section
11677 \begin_inset space ~
11681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11683 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11692 If there are several
11696 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11697 You can therefore use
11701 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11704 \begin_layout Standard
11709 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11710 \begin_inset space ~
11714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11716 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11723 \begin_layout Standard
11724 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11734 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11735 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11747 \begin_layout Subsection
11748 Paragraph Alignment
11749 \begin_inset Index idx
11752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11753 Paragraph ! Alignment
11761 \begin_layout Standard
11762 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11764 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11767 dialog (toolbar button
11770 arg "layout-paragraph"
11774 There are five possibilities:
11777 \begin_layout Itemize
11785 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11791 \begin_layout Itemize
11799 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11805 \begin_layout Itemize
11813 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11819 \begin_layout Itemize
11827 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11833 \begin_layout Itemize
11841 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11847 \begin_layout Standard
11848 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11849 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11850 the left and right margins.
11851 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11854 \begin_layout Standard
11856 This paragraph is right aligned,
11859 \begin_layout Standard
11861 this one is centered,
11864 \begin_layout Standard
11866 this one is left aligned.
11869 \begin_layout Subsection
11871 \begin_inset Index idx
11874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11875 Page breaks ! Forced
11881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11883 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11890 \begin_layout Standard
11891 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11892 does the page breaks in your document, you can
11893 force a page break where you want one.
11894 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11895 is good at page breaking.
11896 Only if you use a lot of
11900 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11901 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11904 \begin_layout Standard
11905 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11906 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11910 have to change the page breaking.
11913 \begin_layout Standard
11914 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11916 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11918 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11919 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11921 \begin_inset space ~
11927 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11929 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11930 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11932 \begin_inset space ~
11937 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11939 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11940 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11943 \begin_layout Standard
11944 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11945 at the top of a page.
11946 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11948 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11949 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11950 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11954 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11958 to learn more about
11965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11969 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11974 \begin_inset Index idx
11977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11978 Page breaks ! Clear
11986 \begin_layout Standard
11987 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11988 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11989 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11990 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11991 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11994 \begin_layout Standard
11995 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11997 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11998 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12000 \begin_inset space ~
12006 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12008 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12009 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12011 \begin_inset space ~
12015 \begin_inset space ~
12020 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12021 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12024 \begin_layout Subsection
12026 \begin_inset Index idx
12029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12036 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12038 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12045 \begin_layout Standard
12046 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12048 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12050 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12051 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12053 \begin_inset space ~
12057 \begin_inset space ~
12065 arg "newline-insert newline"
12069 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12071 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12072 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12074 \begin_inset space ~
12078 \begin_inset space ~
12086 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12089 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12091 This is useful to avoid
12092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12099 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12102 \begin_layout Standard
12103 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12104 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12106 very good at line breaking.
12107 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12108 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12109 \begin_inset space ~
12113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12115 reference "sec:Quote"
12120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12122 reference "sec:Verse"
12127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12129 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12136 \begin_layout Subsection
12138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12140 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12145 \begin_inset Index idx
12148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12157 \begin_layout Standard
12159 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12170 \begin_layout Standard
12174 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12175 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12177 \begin_inset space ~
12182 you can insert horizontal lines.
12183 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12184 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12185 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12188 \begin_layout Standard
12190 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12201 \begin_layout Section
12202 Characters and Symbols
12205 \begin_layout Standard
12206 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12207 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12208 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12216 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12220 for information on how this is done.
12223 \begin_layout Standard
12224 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12229 dialog via the menu
12231 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12232 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12238 \begin_layout Standard
12239 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12247 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12248 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12250 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12258 \begin_layout Section
12259 Fonts and Text Styles
12260 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12262 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12269 \begin_layout Subsection
12271 \begin_inset Index idx
12274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12283 \begin_layout Standard
12284 There are two types of fonts:
12287 \begin_layout Description
12289 \begin_inset space ~
12293 \begin_inset Index idx
12296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12302 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12307 characters) in the font.
12308 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12309 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12310 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12311 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12312 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12313 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12314 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12315 \begin_inset Newline newline
12318 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12319 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12320 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12321 sizes than at small ones.
12322 \begin_inset Newline newline
12336 \begin_inset space ~
12344 \begin_layout Description
12346 \begin_inset space ~
12350 \begin_inset Index idx
12353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12359 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12360 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12361 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12362 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12363 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12364 image manipulation program.
12365 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12366 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12367 \begin_inset space ~
12370 pixels high up to 34
12371 \begin_inset space ~
12374 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12375 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12376 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12378 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12379 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12380 \begin_inset Newline newline
12383 Bitmap fonts are named
12386 \begin_inset space ~
12391 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12394 \begin_layout Standard
12395 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12396 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12397 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12398 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12399 use scalable fonts.
12402 \begin_layout Standard
12403 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12406 \begin_layout Standard
12407 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12408 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12409 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12410 font to emphasize text, you use an
12411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12419 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12421 In \SpecialChar LyX
12422 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12426 \begin_layout Subsection
12429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12431 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12438 \begin_layout Standard
12439 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12440 used its own fonts.
12441 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12442 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12445 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12446 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12447 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12448 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12449 to a word processor.
12450 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12451 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12452 files are very portable across
12453 different machines.
12454 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12455 has increased a lot
12456 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12459 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12461 \begin_inset space ~
12465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12467 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12472 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12473 code in the document
12474 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12477 \begin_layout Standard
12478 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12479 engines that are also able directly
12480 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12482 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12484 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12486 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12487 that is installed on your system.
12488 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12491 \begin_layout Standard
12492 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12500 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12501 es; so you might have to experiment.
12509 \begin_layout Standard
12510 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12519 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12520 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12521 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12522 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12531 \begin_layout Subsection
12532 Document Font and Font size
12533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12535 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12540 \begin_inset Index idx
12543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12550 \begin_inset Index idx
12553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12562 \begin_layout Standard
12563 You can set the document fonts in the
12565 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12569 \begin_inset Index idx
12572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12573 Document ! Settings
12583 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12584 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12587 \begin_inset space ~
12596 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12598 \begin_inset space ~
12601 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12604 \begin_layout Standard
12609 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12610 This requires that you use
12622 as the output format, i.
12623 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12627 \begin_inset space \space{}
12630 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12631 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12632 installed (see section
12633 \begin_inset space ~
12637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12639 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12644 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12646 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12647 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12649 \begin_inset space ~
12652 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12653 cannot determine the family.
12654 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12655 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12658 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12661 \begin_layout Standard
12662 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12663 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12668 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12674 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12675 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12683 \begin_inset space ~
12689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12702 European Computer Modern
12705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12712 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12715 \begin_layout Standard
12724 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12725 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12730 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12733 \begin_inset space ~
12738 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12744 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12745 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12748 \begin_layout Itemize
12752 \begin_inset space ~
12757 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12770 \begin_inset space ~
12775 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12776 community in order to replace
12780 as the default font.
12781 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12782 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12785 \begin_inset space ~
12798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12799 One difference is improved kerning.
12807 \begin_layout Itemize
12811 \begin_inset space ~
12815 \begin_inset space ~
12820 fonts in (the rare) case that
12823 \begin_inset space ~
12828 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12843 Virtual means that it
12844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12855 -glyphs from other fonts.
12856 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12878 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12884 \begin_inset Index idx
12887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12889 -packages ! aeguill
12894 with the document preamble line
12895 \begin_inset Newline newline
12902 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12903 \begin_inset Newline newline
12908 will fix the guillemet problem.
12913 and that accented characters are not
12917 glyph, but built of
12921 characters, the accent and the letter.
12922 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12928 If you search for example for the French word
12929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12936 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12945 and not for the glyph
12946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12950 \begin_inset space ~
12954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12960 \begin_layout Itemize
12961 If you do not like the look of
12969 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12974 \begin_inset space ~
12980 \begin_inset space ~
12990 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12991 \begin_inset space ~
12994 serif and typewriter fonts,
12998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12999 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13000 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13006 \begin_inset space ~
13015 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13016 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13020 \begin_inset space \space{}
13028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13032 \begin_inset space \space{}
13038 \begin_inset space ~
13046 \begin_inset space ~
13056 but you can also select your own.
13057 \begin_inset Newline newline
13060 The differences between roman,
13063 \begin_inset space ~
13072 fonts are explained in section
13073 \begin_inset space ~
13077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13079 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13084 \begin_inset Newline newline
13090 \begin_inset space ~
13095 was originally designed for newspapers.
13096 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13097 into the small newspaper columns.
13101 \begin_inset space ~
13106 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13109 \begin_layout Standard
13110 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13123 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13128 depends on the class you are using.
13129 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13132 \begin_layout Standard
13133 Note that the font size is the
13138 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13139 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13140 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13141 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13144 \begin_inset space ~
13150 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13151 \begin_inset space ~
13155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13157 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13164 \begin_layout Standard
13168 \begin_inset space ~
13173 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13175 \begin_inset space ~
13178 serif or typewriter.
13183 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13193 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13196 \begin_layout Standard
13201 LaTeX font encoding
13203 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13204 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13210 \begin_inset Index idx
13213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13215 -packages ! fontenc
13221 \begin_inset space ~
13225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13227 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13232 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13233 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13240 \begin_layout Standard
13241 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13243 Use Old Style Figures
13247 Use True Small Caps
13250 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13253 Use Old Style Figures
13255 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13257 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13265 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13269 Use True Small Caps
13271 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13272 of scaled capitals.
13273 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13274 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13277 \begin_layout Standard
13282 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13283 a font to display the script characters.
13287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13288 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13294 \begin_inset Index idx
13297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13304 So this has no effect for the document language
13318 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13322 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13330 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13335 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13336 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13338 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13340 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13343 dialog, see section
13344 \begin_inset space ~
13348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13350 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13362 \begin_layout Subsection
13366 \begin_layout Standard
13367 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13368 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13370 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13371 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13372 choose a math font in the dialog
13374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13378 \begin_inset Index idx
13381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13382 Document ! Settings
13388 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13389 automatically selects a math font.
13390 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13391 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13400 \begin_inset space ~
13406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13411 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13412 document font is available.
13415 \begin_layout Standard
13416 Note that the math font will not be used for
13420 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13426 or by the insertion of the command
13433 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13434 \begin_inset space ~
13438 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13439 while the math characters do not.
13441 \begin_inset space ~
13444 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13447 \begin_inset space ~
13455 \begin_inset space ~
13460 in the document font settings.
13463 \begin_layout Standard
13464 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13465 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13466 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13467 font (in most cases
13468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13474 \begin_inset space ~
13480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13483 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13484 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13492 \begin_inset space ~
13498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13504 \begin_layout Subsection
13505 Using Different Character Styles
13506 \begin_inset Index idx
13509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13516 \begin_inset Index idx
13519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13528 \begin_layout Standard
13529 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13530 automatically changes the character style for certain
13531 paragraph environments.
13533 supports two character styles,
13542 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13546 \begin_layout Standard
13551 style, do one of the following:
13554 \begin_layout Itemize
13555 click on the toolbar button
13564 \begin_layout Itemize
13565 use the key binding
13574 \begin_layout Standard
13575 These commands are all toggles.
13580 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13583 \begin_layout Standard
13584 One typically uses the
13588 style for proper names.
13590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13597 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13605 \begin_layout Standard
13606 A more widely used character style is the
13611 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13618 \begin_layout Itemize
13619 clicking on the toolbar button
13628 \begin_layout Itemize
13629 using the keybindings
13638 \begin_layout Standard
13643 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13645 use a different font.
13648 \begin_layout Standard
13649 We've been using the
13653 style all over the place in this document.
13654 Here's one more example:
13657 \begin_layout Quotation
13660 Do not overuse character styles!
13663 \begin_layout Standard
13664 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13665 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13666 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13667 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13671 \begin_layout Standard
13672 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13680 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13682 \begin_inset space ~
13685 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13691 arg "dialog-show character"
13697 \begin_layout Subsection
13698 Fine-Tuning with the
13703 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13705 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13710 \begin_inset Index idx
13713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13722 \begin_layout Standard
13723 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13725 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13726 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13727 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13728 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13729 from ordinary dialog.
13732 \begin_layout Standard
13733 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13734 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13735 \begin_inset Newline newline
13738 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13739 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13742 \begin_layout Standard
13743 To use custom character styles, open the
13745 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13747 \begin_inset space ~
13750 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13753 dialog or press the toolbar button
13756 arg "dialog-show character"
13760 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13761 font property that you can choose.
13762 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13765 \begin_inset space ~
13770 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13775 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13776 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13777 environments all at once.
13780 \begin_layout Standard
13781 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13784 \begin_inset space ~
13796 \begin_layout Labeling
13797 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13811 The possible options are:
13815 \begin_layout Labeling
13816 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13821 This is the Roman font family.
13822 Normally a serif font.
13823 It's also the default family.
13833 \begin_layout Labeling
13834 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13838 \begin_inset space ~
13845 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13857 \begin_layout Labeling
13858 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13865 This is the Typewriter font family.
13871 arg "font-typewriter"
13880 \begin_layout Labeling
13881 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13886 This corresponds to the print weight.
13891 \begin_layout Labeling
13892 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13897 This is the Medium font series.
13898 It's also the default series.
13901 \begin_layout Labeling
13902 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13909 This is the Bold font series.
13922 \begin_layout Labeling
13923 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13928 As the name implies.
13933 \begin_layout Labeling
13934 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13939 This is the Upright font shape.
13940 It's also the default shape.
13943 \begin_layout Labeling
13944 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13958 s the Italic font shape
13964 \begin_layout Labeling
13965 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13972 This is the Slanted font shape
13974 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
13975 , this is different from italic).
13978 \begin_layout Labeling
13979 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13983 \begin_inset space ~
13990 This is the Small caps font shape
13997 \begin_layout Labeling
13998 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14003 Alters the text color.
14004 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14008 \begin_inset space ~
14013 , which means that the document default color set in
14015 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14016 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14022 \begin_inset space ~
14027 is used, you can choose between
14060 \begin_inset Index idx
14063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14072 \begin_layout Labeling
14073 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14078 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14079 the language of the document.
14080 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14081 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14083 \begin_inset Newline newline
14086 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14088 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14089 When using the spell checking (see section
14090 \begin_inset space ~
14094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14096 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14100 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14103 \begin_layout Labeling
14104 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14109 Alters the size of the font.
14110 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14111 proportional to the document font size.
14112 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14113 the details, but a general description of what
14119 \begin_layout Labeling
14120 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14141 arg "font-size tiny"
14147 \begin_layout Labeling
14148 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14169 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14175 \begin_layout Labeling
14176 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14197 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14203 \begin_layout Labeling
14204 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14225 arg "font-size small"
14231 \begin_layout Labeling
14232 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14246 It's also the default size.
14250 arg "font-size normal"
14256 \begin_layout Labeling
14257 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14278 arg "font-size large"
14284 \begin_layout Labeling
14285 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14306 arg "font-size larger"
14312 \begin_layout Labeling
14313 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14334 arg "font-size largest"
14340 \begin_layout Labeling
14341 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14362 arg "font-size huge"
14368 \begin_layout Labeling
14369 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14390 arg "font-size giant"
14396 \begin_layout Labeling
14397 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14402 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14422 arg "font-size increase"
14428 \begin_layout Labeling
14429 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14434 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14454 arg "font-size decrease"
14461 \begin_layout Standard
14466 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14467 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14469 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14470 — use those instead.
14471 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14474 \begin_layout Labeling
14475 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14480 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14485 \begin_layout Labeling
14486 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14493 This is text with emphasize on
14496 This might seem like the same as
14500 , but it is actually a bit different.
14506 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14508 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14511 \begin_layout Labeling
14512 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14519 This is text with Underbar on.
14525 arg "font-underline"
14531 \begin_inset Newline newline
14536 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14537 when you could not change fonts.
14538 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14539 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14540 because some people
14544 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14547 \begin_layout Labeling
14548 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14552 \begin_inset space ~
14559 This is text with Double underbar on.
14565 arg "font-underunderline"
14569 \begin_inset Newline newline
14572 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14573 about double underbar.
14576 \begin_layout Labeling
14577 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14581 \begin_inset space ~
14588 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14594 arg "font-underwave"
14598 \begin_inset Newline newline
14601 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14602 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14605 \begin_layout Labeling
14606 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14613 This is text with Strikeout on.
14619 arg "font-strikeout"
14623 \begin_inset Newline newline
14626 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14627 changed in the meantime.
14630 \begin_layout Labeling
14631 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14638 This is text with Noun on.
14645 , this is a logical attribute.
14646 Normally it's equivalent to
14649 \begin_inset space ~
14658 \begin_layout Standard
14659 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14660 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14662 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14664 \begin_inset space ~
14667 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14673 arg "dialog-show character"
14676 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14677 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14680 arg "textstyle-apply"
14684 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14688 \begin_layout Standard
14689 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14696 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14697 (suppose you just set the shape to
14698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14716 \begin_inset space ~
14728 \begin_layout Standard
14729 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14737 \begin_inset space ~
14749 \begin_layout Itemize
14755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14762 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14780 \begin_inset Newline newline
14784 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14798 \begin_inset Note Note
14801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14802 For more on phantoms see section
14803 \begin_inset space ~
14807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14809 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14819 \begin_inset Newline newline
14825 \begin_layout Itemize
14830 fonts use characters with serifs.
14831 These are the small
14832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14839 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14840 The following example shows the difference:
14841 \begin_inset Newline newline
14845 \begin_inset Newline newline
14850 text without serifs
14853 \begin_inset Newline newline
14856 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14857 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14864 \begin_layout Itemize
14869 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14870 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14871 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14874 \begin_layout Standard
14875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14882 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14883 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14886 \begin_inset space ~
14891 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14892 the property to be removed.
14893 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14894 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14895 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14913 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14914 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14922 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14926 \begin_inset space ~
14931 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14942 If you, for example, set
14943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14961 \begin_inset space ~
14966 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14975 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14978 \begin_layout Standard
14979 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14980 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14983 \begin_layout Section
14984 Printing and Previewing
14987 \begin_layout Subsection
14991 \begin_layout Standard
14992 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14993 using \SpecialChar LyX
14994 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14995 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14996 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14997 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14999 Additional Features
15004 \begin_layout Standard
15006 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15009 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15010 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15011 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15014 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15015 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15016 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15017 to turn your writing into printable output.
15018 This happens in two stages:
15021 \begin_layout Enumerate
15022 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15023 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15025 a file with the extension,
15026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15040 \begin_layout Enumerate
15041 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15042 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15043 to use the commands in the
15047 file to produce printable output.
15050 \begin_layout Subsection
15051 Output file formats
15052 \begin_inset Index idx
15055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15064 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15071 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15072 Simple text (ASCII)
15073 \begin_inset Index idx
15076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15077 File formats ! ASCII
15085 \begin_layout Standard
15086 This file type has the extension
15087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15099 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15103 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15110 \begin_layout Standard
15111 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15113 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15114 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15116 \begin_inset space ~
15122 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15123 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15124 bibliography (section
15125 \begin_inset space ~
15129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15131 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15136 If your document includes such material, use
15138 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15139 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15141 \begin_inset space ~
15145 \begin_inset space ~
15149 \begin_inset space ~
15157 \begin_inset space ~
15161 \begin_inset space ~
15167 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15168 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15171 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15174 \begin_inset Index idx
15177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15178 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15187 \begin_layout Standard
15188 This file type has the extension
15189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15200 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15203 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15204 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15205 -Errors or to process it manually
15206 with console commands.
15207 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15208 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15209 's temporary directory whenever you
15210 view or export your document.
15213 \begin_layout Standard
15214 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15215 -file using the menu
15217 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15218 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15222 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15223 export variants are explained in section
15224 \begin_inset space ~
15228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15230 reference "subsec:Export"
15237 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15239 \begin_inset Index idx
15242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15251 \begin_layout Standard
15252 This file type has the extension
15253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15273 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15274 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15275 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15279 \begin_layout Standard
15280 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15281 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15282 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15283 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15284 when you view the DVI.
15285 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15288 \begin_layout Standard
15289 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15291 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15292 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15297 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15298 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15300 \begin_inset space ~
15306 The latter option uses the program
15308 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15314 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15317 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15318 font access (see section
15319 \begin_inset space ~
15323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15325 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15330 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15331 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15336 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15338 \begin_inset Index idx
15341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15342 File formats ! PostScript
15350 \begin_layout Standard
15351 This file type has the extension
15352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15364 PostScript was developed by the company
15368 as a printer language.
15369 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15371 PostScript can be seen as a
15372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15375 programming language
15376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15379 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15384 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15391 \begin_inset Index idx
15394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15396 -packages ! pstricks
15406 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15409 \begin_layout Standard
15410 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15414 Encapsulated PostScript
15415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15418 (EPS, file extension
15419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15431 As \SpecialChar LyX
15432 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15433 convert them in the background to EPS.
15434 If, for example, you have 50
15435 \begin_inset space ~
15438 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15440 \begin_inset space ~
15443 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15444 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15446 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15447 EPS to avoid this problem.
15450 \begin_layout Standard
15451 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15453 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15454 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15460 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15462 \begin_inset Index idx
15465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15472 \begin_inset Index idx
15475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15484 \begin_layout Standard
15485 This file type has the extension
15486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15502 Portable Document Format
15503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15510 was derived from PostScript.
15511 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15520 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15521 looks exactly the same.
15524 \begin_layout Standard
15525 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15529 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15533 (JPG, file extension
15534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15561 Portable Network Graphics
15562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15565 (PNG, file extension
15566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15578 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15579 converts them in the
15580 background to one of these formats.
15581 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15582 will slow down your workflow.
15583 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15586 \begin_layout Standard
15587 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15589 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15595 \begin_layout Description
15597 \begin_inset space ~
15600 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15604 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15607 \begin_layout Description
15609 \begin_inset space ~
15616 ) This uses the program
15618 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15621 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15624 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15627 is a new engine, derived from
15631 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15632 access (see section
15633 \begin_inset space ~
15637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15639 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15644 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15645 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15650 \begin_layout Description
15652 \begin_inset space ~
15659 ) This uses the program
15664 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15670 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15671 font access (see section
15672 \begin_inset space ~
15676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15678 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15683 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15684 vertically written Japanese.
15687 \begin_layout Description
15689 \begin_inset space ~
15692 (cropped) This is the same as
15695 \begin_inset space ~
15700 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15701 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15702 to generate good-looking
15703 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15706 \begin_layout Description
15708 \begin_inset space ~
15711 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15715 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15719 \begin_layout Description
15721 \begin_inset space ~
15724 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15728 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15729 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15733 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15734 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15737 \begin_layout Standard
15741 \begin_inset space ~
15750 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15751 works without problems.
15752 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15753 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15757 \begin_inset space ~
15765 \begin_inset space ~
15770 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15778 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15780 \begin_inset Index idx
15783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15784 FileFormats ! XHTML
15790 \begin_inset Index idx
15793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15802 \begin_layout Standard
15803 This file type has the extension
15804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15816 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15817 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15818 When \SpecialChar LyX
15819 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15820 suitable for the purpose.
15821 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15823 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15824 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15827 between different formats, which are described in section
15829 Math Output in XHTML
15834 \begin_inset space ~
15842 \begin_layout Standard
15843 XHTML output remains
15844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15851 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15852 features are supported yet.
15856 and the World Wide Web
15860 Additional Features
15862 manual, for more information.
15865 \begin_layout Standard
15866 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15868 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15869 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15875 \begin_layout Subsection
15877 \begin_inset Index idx
15880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15889 \begin_layout Standard
15890 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15891 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15900 or use the toolbar button
15907 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15908 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15909 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15915 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15919 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15921 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15927 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15932 Further output formats can be selected via
15934 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15935 View (Other Formats)
15937 or the toolbar button
15938 \begin_inset Graphics
15939 filename ../images/view-others.png
15941 groupId toolbarbuttons
15948 \begin_layout Standard
15949 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15950 viewer window using the menu
15952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15957 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15958 Update (Other Formats)
15963 \begin_layout Standard
15964 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
15967 To have a real output, export your document.
15970 \begin_layout Section
15971 A few Words about Typography
15972 \begin_inset Index idx
15975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15984 \begin_layout Subsection
15985 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15986 \begin_inset Index idx
15989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15996 \begin_inset Index idx
15999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16008 \begin_layout Standard
16009 In \SpecialChar LyX
16011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16022 character comes in four lengths: the
16034 , and the minus sign:
16035 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16041 \begin_layout Standard
16042 \begin_inset Tabular
16043 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16044 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16045 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16046 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16047 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16048 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16077 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16117 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16142 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16144 \begin_inset space ~
16147 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16154 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16181 \begin_inset space ~
16184 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16205 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16239 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16245 \begin_layout Standard
16246 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16258 character multiple times in a row.
16259 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16260 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16293 \begin_layout Standard
16294 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16295 math mode and has a length of its own.
16296 Here are some examples:
16299 \begin_layout Enumerate
16300 line- and page-breaks
16301 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16311 \begin_layout Enumerate
16313 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16323 \begin_layout Enumerate
16324 Oh — there's a dash.
16325 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16335 \begin_layout Enumerate
16336 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16340 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16350 \begin_layout Subsection
16352 \begin_inset Index idx
16355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16364 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16371 \begin_layout Standard
16372 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16373 but automatically in the output.
16374 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16380 \begin_inset Index idx
16383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16390 following the rules of the document language.
16393 \begin_layout Standard
16395 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16399 font and with unusual constructs, like
16400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16408 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16409 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16410 This is done with the menu
16412 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16413 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16415 \begin_inset space ~
16421 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16423 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16427 \begin_layout Standard
16428 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16429 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16440 would then see the hyphen
16441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16448 as a hyphenation possibility.
16449 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16450 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16451 as described in section
16452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16455 Prevent Hyphenation
16456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16462 \begin_inset space ~
16470 \begin_layout Subsection
16472 \begin_inset Index idx
16475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16484 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16485 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16488 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16495 \begin_layout Standard
16496 When \SpecialChar LyX
16497 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16498 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16500 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16506 appropriate amount of space.
16507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16510 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16512 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16513 gets after another word.
16516 \begin_layout Standard
16517 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16518 not work in all cases.
16520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16531 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16532 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16535 \begin_layout Standard
16536 Here are some examples of
16540 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16543 \begin_layout Itemize
16548 \begin_layout Itemize
16553 \begin_layout Standard
16554 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16557 \begin_layout Itemize
16559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16563 this is too much space!
16566 \begin_layout Itemize
16571 \begin_layout Standard
16572 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16575 \begin_layout Standard
16576 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16579 \begin_layout Enumerate
16583 \begin_inset space ~
16588 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16589 \begin_inset space ~
16593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16595 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16600 \begin_inset Index idx
16603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16604 Spaces ! inter-word
16612 \begin_layout Enumerate
16616 \begin_inset space ~
16621 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16622 \begin_inset space ~
16626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16628 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16633 \begin_inset Index idx
16636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16645 \begin_layout Enumerate
16649 \begin_inset space ~
16653 \begin_inset space ~
16657 \begin_inset space ~
16664 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16666 \begin_inset space ~
16671 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16672 This function is also bound to
16675 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16681 \begin_layout Standard
16682 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16685 \begin_layout Itemize
16687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16691 \begin_inset space \space{}
16694 this is too much space!
16697 \begin_layout Itemize
16698 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16702 \begin_layout Standard
16703 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16704 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16706 will take care of this.
16709 \begin_layout Standard
16710 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16714 \begin_inset space ~
16720 feature described in the section
16722 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16727 Additional Features
16732 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16734 \begin_inset Index idx
16737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16738 Typography ! Quotes
16744 \begin_inset Index idx
16747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16778 \begin_layout Standard
16780 usually sets quotes correctly.
16781 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16782 and use a closing quote at the end.
16784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16792 The keyboard character,
16796 , generates this automatically.
16799 \begin_layout Standard
16800 You can specify what character the
16804 key produces using the submenu
16810 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16814 \begin_inset Index idx
16817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16818 Document ! Settings
16828 There are six choices:
16831 \begin_layout Labeling
16832 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16855 \begin_layout Labeling
16856 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16859 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16863 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16869 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16873 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16879 \begin_layout Labeling
16880 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16883 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16887 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16893 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16897 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16903 \begin_layout Labeling
16904 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16907 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16911 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16917 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16921 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16927 \begin_layout Labeling
16928 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16931 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16935 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16941 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16945 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16951 \begin_layout Labeling
16952 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16955 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16959 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16965 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16969 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16975 \begin_layout Standard
16976 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16979 arg "quote-insert single"
16985 \begin_layout Subsection
16987 \begin_inset Index idx
16990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16991 Typography ! Ligatures
16997 \begin_inset Index idx
17000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17031 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17038 \begin_layout Standard
17039 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17040 print them as single characters.
17041 These groups are known as
17046 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17047 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17049 Here are the standard ligatures:
17052 \begin_layout Itemize
17056 \begin_layout Itemize
17060 \begin_layout Itemize
17064 \begin_layout Itemize
17068 \begin_layout Itemize
17072 \begin_layout Standard
17073 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17076 \begin_layout Standard
17077 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17078 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17086 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17102 To break a ligature, use
17104 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17105 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17107 \begin_inset space ~
17114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17125 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17142 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17150 \begin_layout Subsection
17152 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17154 \begin_inset Index idx
17157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17167 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17174 \begin_layout Standard
17177 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17181 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17184 \begin_layout Description
17186 The name of the game.
17189 \begin_layout Description
17191 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17195 \begin_layout Description
17197 The \SpecialChar TeX
17198 macro colletion used by \SpecialChar LyX
17202 \begin_layout Description
17203 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17204 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17208 \begin_layout Standard
17209 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17215 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17223 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17224 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17225 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17226 converges to the number
17227 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17230 : The actual version is
17231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17239 , the previous one was
17240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17251 \begin_layout Subsection
17253 \begin_inset Index idx
17256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17265 \begin_layout Standard
17266 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17267 space between two words.
17268 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17278 for units use the menu
17280 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17281 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17283 \begin_inset space ~
17291 arg "space-insert thin"
17297 \begin_layout Standard
17298 Here is an example to show the differences:
17301 \begin_layout Standard
17302 \begin_inset Tabular
17303 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17304 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17305 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17306 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17313 \begin_inset space ~
17317 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17329 space between number and unit
17336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17345 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17357 half space between number and unit
17370 \begin_layout Subsection
17372 \begin_inset Index idx
17375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17376 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17384 \begin_layout Standard
17385 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17387 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17388 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17389 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17390 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17391 These bits of text became known as
17402 \begin_layout Standard
17403 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17404 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17405 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17406 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17407 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17408 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17409 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17410 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17411 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17412 \begin_inset Newline newline
17420 \begin_inset Newline newline
17428 \begin_inset Newline newline
17431 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17432 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17433 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17435 \begin_inset space ~
17439 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17441 key "latexcompanion"
17446 \begin_inset space ~
17450 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17456 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17457 's page break mechanism.
17460 \begin_layout Chapter
17461 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17464 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17471 \begin_layout Standard
17472 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17475 \begin_inset space ~
17481 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17484 \begin_layout Section
17486 \begin_inset Index idx
17489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17505 \begin_layout Standard
17507 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17510 \begin_layout Description
17513 \begin_inset space ~
17516 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17517 \begin_inset Newline newline
17521 \begin_inset Note Note
17524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17525 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17533 \begin_layout Description
17534 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17535 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17536 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17539 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17540 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17542 \begin_inset space ~
17548 \begin_inset Newline newline
17552 \begin_inset Note Comment
17555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17556 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17565 \begin_layout Description
17567 \begin_inset space ~
17570 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17571 set in the document settings under
17573 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17575 \begin_inset space ~
17581 \begin_inset Newline newline
17585 \begin_inset Newline newline
17589 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17598 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17599 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17604 of a comment that appears in the output.
17610 \begin_inset Newline newline
17614 \begin_inset Newline newline
17617 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17620 \begin_layout Standard
17621 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17629 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17633 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17636 \begin_layout Section
17638 \begin_inset Index idx
17641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17650 name "sec:Footnotes"
17657 \begin_layout Standard
17659 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17665 or the toolbar button
17668 arg "footnote-insert"
17680 \begin_inset Graphics
17681 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17690 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17691 's representation of your footnote.
17701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17720 label, the box will
17724 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17725 Clicking on the box label again will close
17738 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17739 and click on the footnote
17754 \begin_layout Standard
17755 Here is an example footnote:
17763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17764 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17772 \begin_layout Standard
17773 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17774 position where the footnote box is placed.
17775 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17776 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17777 according to the document class.
17779 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17780 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17786 ey are described in the
17789 \begin_inset space ~
17797 \begin_layout Section
17799 \begin_inset Index idx
17802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17811 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17818 \begin_layout Standard
17819 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17821 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17823 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17825 \begin_inset space ~
17830 or the toolbar button
17833 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17859 appearing within your text.
17860 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17861 's representation of your margin
17870 \begin_layout Standard
17871 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17875 \begin_inset Marginal
17878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17880 This is a marginal note.
17888 \begin_layout Standard
17889 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17890 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17891 pages, right on odd pages.
17894 \begin_layout Standard
17895 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17898 \begin_inset space ~
17906 \begin_inset space ~
17914 \begin_layout Section
17915 Graphics and Images
17916 \begin_inset Index idx
17919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17926 \begin_inset Index idx
17929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17936 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17938 name "sec:Graphics"
17945 \begin_layout Standard
17946 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17947 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17950 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17955 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17959 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17962 \begin_layout Standard
17963 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17968 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17969 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17971 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17972 \begin_inset space ~
17976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17978 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17985 \begin_layout Standard
17990 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17991 of the image in the output.
17992 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17996 \begin_inset space ~
18000 \begin_inset space ~
18009 \begin_inset space ~
18013 \begin_inset space ~
18017 \begin_inset space ~
18022 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18023 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18031 \begin_layout Standard
18035 \begin_inset space ~
18039 \begin_inset space ~
18044 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18045 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18047 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18052 \begin_inset space ~
18057 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18058 with the image size is printed.
18061 \begin_layout Standard
18062 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18063 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18065 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18068 \begin_layout Standard
18070 \begin_inset Graphics
18071 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18079 \begin_layout Standard
18080 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18081 the image into a float, see section
18082 \begin_inset space ~
18086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18088 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18095 \begin_layout Subsection
18097 \begin_inset Index idx
18100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18109 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18116 \begin_layout Standard
18117 You can insert images in any known file format.
18118 But as we explained in section
18119 \begin_inset space ~
18123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18125 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18129 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18131 therefore uses the program
18135 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18136 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18137 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18138 \begin_inset space ~
18142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18144 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18151 \begin_layout Standard
18152 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18155 \begin_layout Description
18157 \begin_inset space ~
18160 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18161 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18162 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18166 Graphics Interchange Format
18167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18170 (GIF, file extension
18171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18183 \begin_inset Index idx
18186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18218 Portable Network Graphics
18219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18222 (PNG, file extension
18223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18235 \begin_inset Index idx
18238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18270 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18274 (JPG, file extension
18275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18299 \begin_inset Index idx
18302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18333 \begin_layout Description
18335 \begin_inset space ~
18338 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18340 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18341 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18342 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18343 \begin_inset Newline newline
18346 Scalable image formats can be
18347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18350 Scalable Vector Graphics
18351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18354 (SVG, file extension
18355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18367 \begin_inset Index idx
18370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18402 Encapsulated PostScript
18403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18406 (EPS, file extension
18407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18419 \begin_inset Index idx
18422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18454 Portable Document Format
18455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18458 (PDF, file extension
18459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18471 \begin_inset Index idx
18474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18489 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18490 result will not be scalable.
18491 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18497 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18505 \begin_layout Standard
18506 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18513 \begin_layout Subsection
18514 Grouping of Image Settings
18515 \begin_inset Index idx
18518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18519 Images ! Settings grouping
18527 \begin_layout Standard
18528 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18530 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18531 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18533 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18534 need to manually change each of them.
18538 \begin_layout Standard
18539 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18542 \begin_inset space ~
18546 \begin_inset space ~
18558 \begin_inset space ~
18562 \begin_inset space ~
18568 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18569 and checking the name of the desired group.
18572 \begin_layout Section
18574 \begin_inset Index idx
18577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18584 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18593 \begin_layout Standard
18594 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18597 arg "tabular-insert"
18602 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18606 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18607 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18608 from the rest of the table.
18609 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18610 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18612 Here is an example table:
18615 \begin_layout Standard
18617 \begin_inset Tabular
18618 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18619 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18620 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18621 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18622 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18623 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18823 \begin_layout Subsection
18827 \begin_layout Standard
18828 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18831 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
18835 This brings up the table dialog.
18836 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18837 cursor is placed currently.
18838 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18839 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18840 done on all of your selection.
18843 \begin_layout Standard
18844 In addition to the table dialog, the
18847 \begin_inset space ~
18852 helps you in setting table properties.
18853 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18856 \begin_layout Standard
18860 \begin_inset space ~
18865 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18866 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18867 current cell respectively.
18868 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18870 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18871 of text, see section
18872 \begin_inset space ~
18876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18878 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18885 \begin_layout Standard
18886 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18887 using the check box
18896 This will merge the cells to
18900 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18901 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18902 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18903 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18904 in the last row without the upper border:
18907 \begin_layout Standard
18909 \begin_inset Tabular
18910 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18911 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18912 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18913 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18914 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18915 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18926 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18935 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19011 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19046 \begin_layout Standard
19047 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19048 -arguments for the table.
19049 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19050 explained in the chapter
19057 \begin_inset space ~
19063 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19064 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19065 but are visible in the output.
19068 \begin_layout Standard
19069 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19077 Most DVI-viewers are
19081 able to display rotations.
19089 \begin_layout Standard
19094 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19099 adds lines for all cell borders.
19102 \begin_layout Subsection
19104 \begin_inset Index idx
19107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19108 Tables ! Longtables
19114 \begin_inset Index idx
19117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19126 \begin_layout Standard
19127 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19130 \begin_inset space ~
19134 \begin_inset space ~
19143 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19144 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19147 \begin_layout Description
19152 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19153 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19154 except for the first page, if
19157 \begin_inset space ~
19165 \begin_layout Description
19169 \begin_inset space ~
19174 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19175 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19178 \begin_layout Description
19183 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19184 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19185 except for the last page, if
19188 \begin_inset space ~
19196 \begin_layout Description
19200 \begin_inset space ~
19205 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19206 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19209 \begin_layout Description
19210 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19211 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19213 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19217 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19220 \begin_inset space ~
19228 \begin_layout Standard
19229 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19230 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19231 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19237 In this context, first means first in this order:
19240 \begin_inset space ~
19252 \begin_inset space ~
19257 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19260 \begin_layout Standard
19262 \begin_inset Tabular
19263 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19264 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19265 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19266 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19267 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19268 <row endfirsthead="true">
19269 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19275 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19280 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19289 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19299 <row endfirsthead="true">
19300 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19311 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19320 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19332 <row endhead="true">
19333 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19344 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19353 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19363 <row endhead="true">
19364 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19375 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19384 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19396 <row endfoot="true">
19397 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19408 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19417 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19448 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20389 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20398 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20407 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20418 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20449 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20480 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20511 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20542 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20573 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20604 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20635 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20666 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20697 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20728 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20759 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20790 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20821 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20852 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20883 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20914 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20945 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20976 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21038 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21069 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21100 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21131 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21162 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21193 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21224 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21255 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21286 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21317 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21348 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21378 <row endlastfoot="true">
21379 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21390 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21399 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21416 \begin_layout Subsection
21418 \begin_inset Index idx
21421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21430 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21437 \begin_layout Standard
21438 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21439 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21440 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21441 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21445 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21448 \begin_layout Standard
21449 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21450 for the column in the table dialog.
21451 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21452 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21456 \begin_layout Standard
21458 \begin_inset Tabular
21459 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21460 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21461 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21462 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21463 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21483 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21552 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21608 This is longer now.
21613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21664 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21665 This is longer now.
21670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21696 \begin_layout Standard
21697 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21698 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21703 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21704 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21710 Selection with the mouse or with
21714 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21715 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21716 the selection from outside the table.
21719 \begin_layout Section
21721 \begin_inset Index idx
21724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21740 \begin_layout Subsection
21744 \begin_layout Standard
21745 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21746 have a fixed location.
21748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21755 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21763 \begin_inset space ~
21768 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21769 too many notes on the current page.
21772 \begin_layout Standard
21773 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21774 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21775 and pages without text.
21776 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21777 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21778 Floats are therefore numbered.
21779 Referencing is described in section
21780 \begin_inset space ~
21784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21786 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21793 \begin_layout Standard
21794 To insert a float, use the menu
21796 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21800 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21801 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21803 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21804 \begin_inset Index idx
21807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21813 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21814 paragraph within the float.
21815 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21816 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21817 left-clicking on the box label.
21818 A closed float box looks like this:
21819 \begin_inset Graphics
21820 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21825 – a gray button with a red label.
21828 \begin_layout Standard
21829 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
21831 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21834 \begin_layout Subsection
21836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21838 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21843 \begin_inset Index idx
21846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21847 Floats ! Figure floats
21855 \begin_layout Standard
21857 \begin_inset space ~
21861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21863 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21867 was created using the menu
21869 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21870 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21876 arg "float-insert figure"
21880 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21883 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21889 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21893 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21894 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21896 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21898 \begin_inset space ~
21906 arg "layout-paragraph"
21912 \begin_layout Standard
21913 \begin_inset Float figure
21918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21920 \begin_inset Graphics
21921 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21931 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21936 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21940 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21953 \begin_layout Standard
21954 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21955 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21957 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21966 ) and refer to it using the menu
21968 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21974 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21978 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21979 vague references like
21980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21987 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
21988 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
21990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21998 For more about cross-references, see section
21999 \begin_inset space ~
22003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22005 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22012 \begin_layout Standard
22013 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22014 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22015 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22016 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22017 as described in section
22018 \begin_inset space ~
22022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22024 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22030 \begin_inset space ~
22034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22036 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22040 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22041 You can also set the images one below the other.
22043 \begin_inset space ~
22047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22049 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22056 reference "fig:Platypus"
22060 are the subfigures.
22063 \begin_layout Standard
22064 \begin_inset Float figure
22069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22070 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22074 \begin_inset Float figure
22079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22080 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22083 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22085 name "fig:Undefinable"
22097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22098 \begin_inset Graphics
22099 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22110 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22114 \begin_inset Float figure
22119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22120 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22125 name "fig:Platypus"
22137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22138 \begin_inset Graphics
22139 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22151 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22158 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22163 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22167 Two distorted images.
22180 \begin_layout Subsection
22182 \begin_inset Index idx
22185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22186 Floats ! Table floats
22194 \begin_layout Standard
22195 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22197 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22198 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22201 or the toolbar button
22204 arg "float-insert table"
22208 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22209 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22210 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22212 \begin_inset space ~
22216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22218 reference "tab:Table-float"
22225 \begin_layout Standard
22226 \begin_inset Float table
22231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22232 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22235 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22237 name "tab:Table-float"
22249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22251 \begin_inset Tabular
22252 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22253 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22254 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22255 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22256 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22383 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22404 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22407 \end{array}\right]$
22415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22428 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22449 \begin_layout Subsection
22451 \begin_inset Index idx
22454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22463 \begin_layout Standard
22465 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22466 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22467 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22469 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22477 \begin_inset space ~
22485 \begin_layout Section
22487 \begin_inset Index idx
22490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22499 \begin_layout Standard
22501 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22503 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22504 \begin_inset space \space{}
22511 \begin_layout Standard
22512 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22513 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22515 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22519 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22520 and its alignment within the page.
22523 \begin_layout Standard
22525 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22535 height_special "totalheight"
22540 backgroundcolor "none"
22543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22546 This is a minipage.
22547 The text is set in an italic style.
22550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22553 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22554 another formatting.
22562 \begin_layout Standard
22563 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22566 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22570 as described in section
22571 \begin_inset space ~
22575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22577 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22582 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22588 \begin_layout Standard
22589 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22599 height_special "totalheight"
22604 backgroundcolor "none"
22607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22608 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22609 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22615 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22619 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22629 height_special "totalheight"
22634 backgroundcolor "none"
22637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22638 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22639 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22647 \begin_layout Standard
22648 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22654 \begin_layout Standard
22655 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22657 All box types and their settings
22658 \change_inserted 2047637253 1447344632
22659 , as well as variable-width minipages,
22661 are explained in detail in chapter
22668 \begin_inset space ~
22676 \begin_layout Chapter
22677 Mathematical Formulas
22678 \begin_inset Index idx
22681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22688 \begin_inset Index idx
22691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22722 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22729 \begin_layout Standard
22730 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22735 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22738 \begin_layout Section
22740 \begin_inset Index idx
22743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22752 \begin_layout Standard
22753 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22766 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22768 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22769 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22770 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22772 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22778 \begin_layout Standard
22779 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22783 \begin_inset space ~
22788 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22791 \begin_layout Standard
22792 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22793 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22796 \begin_layout Standard
22797 This is a line with an inline formula
22798 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22804 \begin_layout Standard
22805 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22806 paragraph, like this one:
22807 \begin_inset Formula
22814 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22817 \begin_layout Standard
22819 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22821 For example, typing
22822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22835 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22836 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22840 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22843 \begin_inset space ~
22851 \begin_layout Subsection
22852 Navigating in Formulas
22853 \begin_inset Index idx
22856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22865 \begin_layout Standard
22866 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22867 achieved with the arrow keys.
22869 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22870 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22875 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22876 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22880 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22884 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22887 \end{array}\right]$
22895 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22900 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22901 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22904 \begin_layout Standard
22909 , printed in this document as
22910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22914 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22921 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22922 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22923 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22928 For example, if you want
22929 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22937 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22947 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22951 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22956 , since in the latter case only the
22959 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22964 will be under the square root sign:
22965 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22971 \begin_layout Standard
22972 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22974 \begin_inset Formula
22976 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22985 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22986 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22989 \begin_layout Subsection
22993 \begin_layout Standard
22994 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22995 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22999 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23000 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23001 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23002 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23003 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23007 \begin_layout Subsection
23008 Exponents and Subscripts
23009 \begin_inset Index idx
23012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23019 \begin_inset Index idx
23022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23031 \begin_layout Standard
23032 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23035 arg "math-superscript"
23041 arg "math-subscript"
23044 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23046 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23049 , type in a formula
23052 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23062 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23068 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23072 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23078 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23084 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23093 , you have to use an extra
23097 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23098 For example, if you want
23099 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23105 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23111 Subscripts are similar: To get
23112 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23118 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23126 \begin_layout Subsection
23128 \begin_inset Index idx
23131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23140 \begin_layout Standard
23141 Create a fraction either with the command
23147 or by using the icon
23150 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23156 \begin_inset space ~
23162 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23163 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23164 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23169 To move back up, press
23174 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23175 \begin_inset Formula
23177 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23180 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23188 \begin_layout Subsection
23190 \begin_inset Index idx
23193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23202 \begin_layout Standard
23203 Roots can be created using the
23206 \begin_inset space ~
23214 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23220 arg "math-insert \\root"
23242 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23248 always produces a square root.
23251 \begin_layout Subsection
23252 Operators with Limits
23253 \begin_inset Index idx
23256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23263 \begin_inset Index idx
23266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23275 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23282 \begin_layout Standard
23284 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23288 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23291 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23292 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23293 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23294 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23295 The sum operator will automatically place its
23296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23303 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23305 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23309 \begin_inset Formula
23311 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23316 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23320 \begin_layout Standard
23321 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23323 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23324 behind the operator and using the menu
23326 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23327 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23329 \begin_inset space ~
23333 \begin_inset space ~
23347 \begin_layout Standard
23348 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23357 \begin_inset Index idx
23360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23367 \begin_inset Formula
23369 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23374 which will place the
23375 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23387 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23388 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23394 \begin_layout Standard
23395 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23402 Have a look at section
23403 \begin_inset space ~
23407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23409 reference "subsec:Functions"
23413 for an explanation of function macros.
23416 \begin_layout Subsection
23418 \begin_inset Index idx
23421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23430 \begin_layout Standard
23431 Most math symbols can be found in the
23434 \begin_inset space ~
23439 under one of several categories; including
23456 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23460 \begin_layout Standard
23461 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23462 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23463 don't have to use the
23466 \begin_inset space ~
23471 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23473 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23476 \begin_layout Subsection
23478 \begin_inset Index idx
23481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23490 \begin_layout Standard
23491 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23497 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23503 \begin_inset space ~
23511 arg "math-insert \\space"
23515 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23516 For example, the sequence
23521 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23524 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23526 \begin_inset Graphics
23527 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23532 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23533 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23534 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23535 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23536 , because they are negative
23538 Here are two examples:
23541 \begin_layout Standard
23551 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23557 \begin_layout Standard
23567 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23573 \begin_layout Subsection
23575 \begin_inset Index idx
23578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23587 name "subsec:Functions"
23594 \begin_layout Standard
23598 \begin_inset space ~
23603 contains under the button
23606 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23609 a number of function macros, such as
23610 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23614 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23622 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23629 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23630 avoid confusions, because
23631 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23635 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23641 \begin_layout Standard
23642 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23644 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23648 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23654 \begin_layout Standard
23655 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23656 are placed, as described in section
23657 \begin_inset space ~
23661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23663 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23670 \begin_layout Subsection
23672 \begin_inset Index idx
23675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23684 \begin_layout Standard
23685 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23687 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23688 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23689 commands, for example, to enter
23690 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23693 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23694 Our example is entered by typing
23699 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23706 \begin_inset space ~
23710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23712 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23716 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23719 \begin_layout Standard
23720 \begin_inset Float table
23725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23726 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23731 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23735 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23745 \begin_inset Tabular
23746 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23747 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23748 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23749 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23750 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23834 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23888 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23942 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23996 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24050 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24104 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24158 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24212 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24266 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24311 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24332 \begin_layout Standard
24333 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24336 \begin_inset space ~
24344 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24347 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24351 \begin_layout Section
24352 Brackets and Delimiters
24353 \begin_inset Index idx
24356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24363 \begin_inset Index idx
24366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24375 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24382 \begin_layout Standard
24383 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24385 For some purposes, using just the keys
24390 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24391 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24392 toolbar delimiter icon
24395 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24399 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24400 \begin_inset Formula
24402 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24410 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24411 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24415 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24418 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24424 \begin_inset Formula
24426 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24434 \begin_layout Standard
24435 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24436 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24440 \begin_layout Standard
24441 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24442 left side and right side.
24443 If you use the option
24446 \begin_inset space ~
24451 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24452 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24454 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24459 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24460 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24463 \begin_layout Standard
24464 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24465 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24466 is to go inside the brackets.
24467 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24472 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24473 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24474 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24478 arg "math-delim ( )"
24484 \begin_layout Section
24485 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24486 \begin_inset Index idx
24489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24496 \begin_inset Index idx
24499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24506 \begin_inset Index idx
24509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24510 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24518 \begin_layout Standard
24519 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24523 \begin_inset space ~
24531 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24535 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24536 Here is an example:
24537 \begin_inset Formula
24539 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24548 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24549 \begin_inset space ~
24553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24555 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24560 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24561 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24562 This alignment is set in the box
24567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24616 for every column as default.
24617 For example, the sequence
24618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24629 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24630 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24631 corresponds to the relevant column.
24632 The result will look like this:
24633 \begin_inset Formula
24636 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24637 column & has & has\,right\\
24638 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24647 \begin_layout Standard
24648 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24651 arg "newline-insert newline"
24654 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24655 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24657 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24660 or the math toolbar.
24663 \begin_layout Standard
24664 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24665 It can be created with the menu
24667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24668 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24670 \begin_inset space ~
24682 Here is an example:
24683 \begin_inset Formula
24697 \begin_layout Standard
24698 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24701 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24704 arg "newline-insert newline"
24708 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24713 arg "newline-insert newline"
24716 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24724 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24725 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24726 A new row is created by every further entry of
24729 arg "newline-insert newline"
24733 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24734 Here is an example:
24735 \begin_inset Formula
24737 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24738 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24743 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24744 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24745 \begin_inset Formula
24747 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24755 \begin_layout Standard
24756 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24763 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24764 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24767 reference "eq:asquared"
24772 The other types are described in section
24773 \begin_inset space ~
24777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24779 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24786 \begin_layout Section
24787 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24788 \begin_inset Index idx
24791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24792 Math ! Formula numbering
24798 \begin_inset Index idx
24801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24802 Math ! Referencing formulas
24808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24810 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24817 \begin_layout Standard
24818 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24820 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24821 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24823 \begin_inset space ~
24827 \begin_inset space ~
24835 arg "math-number-toggle"
24839 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24840 within parentheses.
24841 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24842 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24843 the document class.
24844 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24845 separated by a dot:
24846 \begin_inset Formula
24856 arg "math-number-toggle"
24859 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24860 You can only number displayed formulas.
24863 \begin_layout Standard
24864 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24866 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24867 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24869 \begin_inset space ~
24873 \begin_inset space ~
24881 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24884 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24885 \begin_inset Formula
24888 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24894 To number all lines use the shortcut
24897 arg "math-number-toggle"
24903 \begin_layout Standard
24904 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24907 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24908 A label is inserted with the menu
24910 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24919 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24920 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24921 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24933 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24934 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24935 We inserted in the following example the label
24936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24943 in the second line:
24944 \begin_inset Formula
24946 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24947 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24952 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24953 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24954 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24956 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24958 \begin_inset space ~
24966 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24970 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24971 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24972 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24973 as the formula number:
24976 \begin_layout Standard
24977 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24980 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24987 \begin_layout Standard
24988 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
24989 's cross-reference box are described in section
24990 \begin_inset space ~
24994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24996 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25001 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25009 \begin_layout Section
25010 User defined math macros
25011 \begin_inset Index idx
25014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25023 \begin_layout Standard
25025 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25026 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25027 Math macros are explained in section
25030 \begin_inset space ~
25042 \begin_layout Section
25046 \begin_layout Subsection
25048 \begin_inset Index idx
25051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25060 \begin_layout Standard
25061 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25062 To set a font in a formula, use the
25065 \begin_inset space ~
25073 arg "math-insert \\font"
25076 , or enter its command, listed in table
25077 \begin_inset space ~
25081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25083 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25090 \begin_layout Standard
25091 \begin_inset Float table
25096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25097 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25102 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25106 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25116 \begin_inset Tabular
25117 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25118 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25119 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25120 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25152 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25179 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25206 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25239 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25266 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25293 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25327 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25354 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25388 \begin_layout Standard
25389 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25397 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25413 \begin_layout Standard
25414 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25415 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25420 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25421 space when you need a space in the box.
25422 Here is an example where
25423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25434 denotes the set of numbers:
25435 \begin_inset Formula
25437 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25445 \begin_layout Standard
25446 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25447 You can, for example, put a character in
25456 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25460 \begin_inset Newline newline
25463 So it is better not to use this feature.
25466 \begin_layout Standard
25467 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25468 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25472 \begin_inset Newline newline
25475 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25481 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25482 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25488 \begin_layout Standard
25495 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25498 \begin_layout Standard
25499 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25501 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25502 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25504 \begin_inset space ~
25512 \begin_layout Subsection
25514 \begin_inset Index idx
25517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25526 \begin_layout Standard
25527 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25529 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25533 \begin_inset space ~
25537 \begin_inset space ~
25545 \begin_inset space ~
25553 arg "math-insert \\font"
25557 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25558 in black instead of blue.
25559 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25560 Here is an example:
25561 \begin_inset Formula
25564 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25565 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25574 \begin_layout Subsection
25576 \begin_inset Index idx
25579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25588 \begin_layout Standard
25589 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25590 automatically chosen in most situations.
25608 For most characters,
25616 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25617 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25622 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25623 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25624 thinks are appropriate.
25625 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25628 arg "math-insert \\style"
25632 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25633 For example, you can set
25634 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25637 , which is normally in
25646 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25650 The four styles are used in the following example:
25653 \begin_layout Standard
25654 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25658 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25662 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25666 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25672 \begin_layout Standard
25673 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25674 is set in a particular size with the menu
25676 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25678 \begin_inset space ~
25683 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25684 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25685 will be adjusted to correspond.
25686 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25697 \begin_layout Standard
25701 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25707 \begin_layout Section
25708 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25710 \begin_inset Index idx
25713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25720 \begin_inset Index idx
25723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25732 \begin_layout Standard
25734 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25735 that are in common use.
25738 \begin_layout Subsection
25739 Enabling AMS-Support
25742 \begin_layout Standard
25743 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25744 the document by selecting the checkbox
25747 \begin_inset space ~
25751 \begin_inset space ~
25755 \begin_inset space ~
25762 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25766 \begin_inset Index idx
25769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25770 Document ! Settings
25778 \begin_inset space ~
25784 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25785 -errors in formulas,
25786 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25789 \begin_layout Subsection
25791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25793 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25798 \begin_inset Index idx
25801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25802 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25810 \begin_layout Standard
25811 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25812 provides a selection of different formula types.
25814 allows you to choose between
25835 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25836 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25842 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25845 \begin_layout Chapter
25849 \begin_layout Section
25851 \begin_inset Index idx
25854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25861 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25863 name "sec:Cross-References"
25870 \begin_layout Standard
25871 One of \SpecialChar LyX
25872 's strengths is cross-references.
25873 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25875 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25876 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25877 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25880 \begin_layout Enumerate
25884 \begin_layout Enumerate
25885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25887 name "enu:Second-item"
25894 \begin_layout Enumerate
25898 \begin_layout Standard
25899 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25901 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25904 or by pressing the toolbar button
25911 A gray label box like this:
25912 \begin_inset Graphics
25913 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25918 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25920 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25955 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25956 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25972 \begin_layout Standard
25973 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25975 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25978 or the toolbar button
25981 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25985 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25986 \begin_inset Graphics
25987 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25992 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25994 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26007 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26011 \begin_layout Standard
26012 As an alternative to
26014 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26017 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26022 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26023 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26025 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26037 \begin_layout Standard
26038 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26039 \begin_inset space ~
26043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26045 reference "enu:Second-item"
26052 \begin_layout Standard
26053 It is recommended to use a protected space
26057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26058 described in section
26059 \begin_inset space ~
26063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26065 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26074 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26075 line breaks between them.
26078 \begin_layout Standard
26079 There are six formats of cross-references:
26082 \begin_layout Description
26083 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26086 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26093 \begin_layout Description
26094 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26095 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26107 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26114 \begin_layout Description
26115 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26116 \begin_inset space ~
26120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26121 LatexCommand pageref
26122 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26129 \begin_layout Description
26131 \begin_inset space ~
26135 \begin_inset space ~
26138 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26140 LatexCommand vpageref
26141 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26146 \begin_inset Newline newline
26149 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26150 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26151 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26152 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26153 it prints “on the next page”.
26154 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26157 \begin_layout Description
26159 \begin_inset space ~
26163 \begin_inset space ~
26167 \begin_inset space ~
26170 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26173 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26178 \begin_inset Newline newline
26181 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26187 ; otherwise it behaves like
26191 \begin_inset space ~
26195 \begin_inset space ~
26204 \begin_layout Description
26206 \begin_inset space ~
26209 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26210 \begin_inset Newline newline
26214 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26222 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26232 \begin_inset Index idx
26235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26237 -packages ! prettyref
26243 \begin_inset Index idx
26246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26248 -packages ! refstyle
26259 \begin_inset Newline newline
26262 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26263 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26266 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26270 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26271 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26279 is the default and preferred because
26283 supports only English documents.
26284 The format is specified by using the command
26296 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26297 preamble of the document.
26298 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26311 ) can be done with this command
26312 \begin_inset Newline newline
26319 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26324 \begin_inset Newline newline
26327 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26329 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26331 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26338 \begin_layout Description
26340 \begin_inset space ~
26343 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26345 LatexCommand nameref
26346 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26353 \begin_layout Standard
26354 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26355 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26357 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26361 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26365 \begin_layout Standard
26366 You can only use the style
26370 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26374 is always possible.
26377 \begin_layout Standard
26378 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26379 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26381 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26382 \begin_inset space ~
26386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26388 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26395 \begin_layout Standard
26396 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26400 \begin_inset space ~
26404 \begin_inset space ~
26409 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26410 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26413 \begin_inset space ~
26418 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26419 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26422 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26428 \begin_layout Standard
26429 You can change labels at any time.
26430 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26431 do not need to think about this.
26434 \begin_layout Standard
26435 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26437 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26441 \begin_layout Standard
26442 References are described in detail in the section
26443 \begin_inset space ~
26447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26457 \begin_inset space ~
26465 \begin_layout Section
26466 Table of Contents and other Listings
26467 \begin_inset Index idx
26470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26477 \begin_inset Index idx
26480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26496 \begin_layout Subsection
26498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26500 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26507 \begin_layout Standard
26508 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26510 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26511 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26513 \begin_inset space ~
26517 \begin_inset space ~
26523 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26525 If you click on it, the
26529 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26530 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26531 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26533 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26535 \begin_inset space ~
26540 that is described in section
26541 \begin_inset space ~
26545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26547 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26554 \begin_layout Standard
26555 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26556 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26558 \begin_inset space ~
26562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26564 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26568 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26570 \begin_inset space ~
26574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26576 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26580 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26582 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26585 \begin_layout Subsection
26586 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26589 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26596 \begin_layout Standard
26597 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26599 You can insert them via the
26601 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26605 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26608 \begin_layout Section
26609 URLs and Hyperlinks
26610 \begin_inset Index idx
26613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26620 \begin_inset Index idx
26623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26632 \begin_layout Subsection
26634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26643 \begin_layout Standard
26644 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26646 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26652 \begin_layout Standard
26653 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26655 \begin_inset Flex URL
26658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26668 \begin_layout Standard
26669 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26675 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26679 \begin_layout Standard
26680 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26688 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26697 \begin_layout Subsection
26699 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26701 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26708 \begin_layout Standard
26709 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26711 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26714 or with the toolbar button
26721 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26730 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26731 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26732 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26734 name "LyX's homepage"
26735 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26739 , an Email address like this:
26740 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26742 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26743 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26748 , or a link to a file.
26751 \begin_layout Standard
26752 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26765 to the link target.
26768 \begin_layout Standard
26769 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26770 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26771 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26772 the text style dialog.
26773 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26777 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26779 name "LyX's homepage"
26780 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26787 \begin_layout Standard
26788 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26792 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26794 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26795 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26799 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26801 \begin_inset Newline newline
26809 \begin_inset Newline newline
26816 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26819 \begin_layout Section
26821 \begin_inset Index idx
26824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26833 name "sec:Appendices"
26840 \begin_layout Standard
26841 Appendices are created with the menu
26843 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26845 \begin_inset space ~
26849 \begin_inset space ~
26855 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26856 as the appendix part of the book.
26857 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26860 \begin_layout Standard
26861 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26862 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26863 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26864 and the subsection number.
26865 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26869 \begin_layout Standard
26871 \begin_inset space ~
26875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26877 reference "chap:Credits"
26882 \begin_inset space ~
26886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26888 reference "subsec:Export"
26895 \begin_layout Section
26897 \begin_inset Index idx
26900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26907 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26909 name "sec:Bibliography"
26916 \begin_layout Standard
26917 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26919 You can include a bibliography database,
26923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26924 Known under the name
26925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26928 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26938 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26939 manually, using the paragraph environment
26943 , which was described in section
26944 \begin_inset space ~
26948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26950 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
26955 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26956 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26960 use a bibliography database.
26963 \begin_layout Subsection
26964 The Bibliography Environment
26967 \begin_layout Standard
26972 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26974 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26983 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26985 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
26988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26995 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26998 \begin_layout Standard
26999 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27001 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27004 or the toolbar button
27007 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27011 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27012 containing the available citations.
27013 Select one or more keys from the list and
27023 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27024 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27028 \begin_layout Standard
27029 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27030 entry with surrounding brackets.
27035 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27036 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27048 \begin_layout Standard
27052 Companion Second Edition
27055 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27057 key "latexcompanion"
27064 \begin_layout Standard
27065 The \SpecialChar LyX
27066 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27067 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27076 \begin_layout Standard
27077 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27080 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27082 \begin_inset space ~
27090 arg "layout-paragraph"
27094 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27097 \begin_layout Subsection
27098 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27100 \begin_inset Index idx
27103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27104 Bibliography ! Databases
27110 \begin_inset Index idx
27113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27114 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27123 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27130 \begin_layout Standard
27131 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27137 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27139 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27140 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27145 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27147 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27148 your working field in a database.
27149 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27150 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27151 list for that document.
27152 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27156 \begin_layout Standard
27157 The database is a text file with the file extension
27158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27169 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27170 The format is explained in
27171 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27177 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27179 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27181 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27186 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27187 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27188 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27190 \begin_inset Flex URL
27193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27195 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27203 \begin_layout Standard
27204 To use a database, use the menu
27206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27211 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27213 \begin_inset space ~
27219 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27220 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27227 Add bibliography to TOC
27229 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27234 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27235 in the document or just the cited references.
27238 \begin_layout Standard
27239 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27251 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27252 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27253 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27254 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27256 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27262 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27263 \begin_inset Newline newline
27267 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27269 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27281 \begin_layout Standard
27282 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27285 \begin_layout Standard
27286 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27287 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27289 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27296 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27297 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27302 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27303 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27304 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27308 The following variants are possible:
27311 \begin_layout Description
27312 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27313 with other bibliography packages (e.
27314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27318 \begin_inset space \space{}
27325 ), only with the package
27329 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27333 \begin_layout Description
27334 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27335 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27336 with all bibliography packages, except
27341 \begin_layout Description
27342 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27347 , works with all bibliography packages
27350 \begin_layout Standard
27351 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27352 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27354 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27357 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27361 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27370 \begin_layout Standard
27371 When you select the option
27373 Sectioned bibliography
27377 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27378 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27381 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27382 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27384 Customizing Bibliographies
27388 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27393 Additional Features
27398 \begin_layout Standard
27399 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27400 the two methods of creating them.
27401 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27402 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27403 We used the style file
27407 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27410 \begin_layout Subsection
27412 \begin_inset Index idx
27415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27416 Bibliography ! Citation format
27424 \begin_layout Standard
27425 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27426 For this feature you need to enable the option
27432 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27436 \begin_inset Index idx
27439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27440 Document ! Settings
27450 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27451 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27452 style files as explained in
27453 the previous section.
27456 \begin_layout Standard
27457 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27458 the citation reference window.
27459 Here is an example where the text
27460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27464 \begin_inset space ~
27468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27471 appears after the reference:
27474 \begin_layout Standard
27476 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27479 key "latexcompanion"
27486 \begin_layout Section
27488 \begin_inset Index idx
27491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27507 \begin_layout Standard
27508 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27510 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27512 \begin_inset space ~
27517 or the toolbar button
27524 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27525 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27526 by \SpecialChar LyX
27527 as the index entry.
27530 \begin_layout Standard
27531 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27533 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27534 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27536 \begin_inset space ~
27542 A light blue box labeled
27543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27554 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27555 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27559 \begin_layout Standard
27560 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27561 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27562 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27563 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27565 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27567 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27574 \begin_layout Subsection
27575 Grouping Index Entries
27576 \begin_inset Index idx
27579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27588 \begin_layout Standard
27589 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27591 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27592 lists under the entry
27593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27601 First we create the entry
27602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27610 \begin_inset space ~
27614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27616 reference "subsec:Lists"
27621 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27622 \begin_inset space ~
27626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27628 reference "sec:Itemize"
27632 , we insert the command
27635 \begin_layout Standard
27641 \begin_layout Standard
27645 \begin_layout Standard
27651 \begin_layout Standard
27652 for the enumerated list in section
27653 \begin_inset space ~
27657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27659 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27666 \begin_layout Standard
27667 The exclamation mark
27668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27675 marks the grouping levels.
27676 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27677 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27678 If we don't have an index entry for
27679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27686 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27689 \begin_layout Subsection
27691 \begin_inset Index idx
27694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27695 Index ! Page ranges
27703 \begin_layout Standard
27704 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27706 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27707 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27708 an index entry in section
27709 \begin_inset space ~
27713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27715 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27722 \begin_layout Standard
27725 Paragraph environments|(
27728 \begin_layout Standard
27729 and another entry at the end of section
27730 \begin_inset space ~
27734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27736 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27743 \begin_layout Standard
27746 Paragraph environments|)
27749 \begin_layout Standard
27751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27774 respectively start and end the index range.
27775 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27776 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27777 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27778 An example is the index entry
27779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27782 Document ! Settings
27783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27789 \begin_layout Subsection
27791 \begin_inset Index idx
27794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27795 Index ! Cross referencing
27803 \begin_layout Standard
27804 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27805 We referred for example in the index entry
27806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27814 \begin_inset space ~
27818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27820 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
27824 ) to the index entry
27825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27832 in the same section using the entry
27835 \begin_layout Standard
27838 GIF|see{Image formats}
27841 \begin_layout Standard
27842 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
27844 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27845 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27848 \begin_layout Subsection
27850 \begin_inset Index idx
27853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27854 Index ! Entry order
27862 \begin_layout Standard
27863 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27864 follow the rules for the index order.
27865 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
27870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27871 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27873 \begin_inset space ~
27877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27879 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27888 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27889 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27914 \begin_inset Index idx
27917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27918 Dummy entries ! maïs
27924 \begin_inset Index idx
27927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27928 Dummy entries ! maître
27934 \begin_inset Index idx
27937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27938 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27943 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27944 maïs, maison, maître.
27945 To achieve this, we use the command
27948 \begin_layout Standard
27951 previous entry@current entry
27954 \begin_layout Standard
27955 In our case we want to have
27956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27971 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27974 \begin_layout Standard
27980 \begin_layout Standard
27981 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27982 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
27984 See the next subsection for an example.
27987 \begin_layout Standard
27988 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27994 \begin_layout Standard
27995 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28000 to generate the index (see sec.
28001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28007 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28016 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28017 -package aeguill in sec.
28018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28024 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28028 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28029 -packages although all these index
28030 commands start with
28031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28044 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28049 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28052 \begin_layout Standard
28064 \begin_layout Standard
28076 \begin_layout Subsection
28078 \begin_inset Index idx
28081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28082 Index ! Entry layout
28090 \begin_layout Standard
28091 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28092 \begin_inset Index idx
28095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28098 This is an italic dummy entry
28103 You can also format the page number using the character
28104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28111 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28112 -command without a backslash.
28113 We can write for example
28116 \begin_layout Standard
28119 italic page number:|textit
28122 \begin_layout Standard
28123 to get the page number in italic.
28124 \begin_inset Index idx
28127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28128 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28133 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28134 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28152 \begin_inset space ~
28158 Have a look at section
28159 \begin_inset space ~
28163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28165 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28169 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28173 \begin_layout Standard
28174 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28182 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28186 to generate the index, see sec.
28187 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28193 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28202 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28207 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28208 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28211 key "latexcompanion"
28223 \begin_layout Standard
28224 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28226 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28227 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28228 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28229 If so, put the following in the preamble
28232 \begin_layout Standard
28244 \begin_layout Standard
28248 \begin_layout Standard
28254 \begin_layout Standard
28255 in the index entry.
28256 \begin_inset Index idx
28259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28260 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28265 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28266 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28267 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28270 \begin_layout Standard
28271 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28272 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28273 a bold font for all index entries.
28274 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28286 documentation for details,
28287 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28289 key "makeindex,xindy"
28296 \begin_layout Subsection
28298 \begin_inset Index idx
28301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28310 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28317 \begin_layout Standard
28318 If the index generation program
28322 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28323 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28327 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28328 distribution, is used.
28332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28337 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28338 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28339 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28340 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28341 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28351 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28353 dialog, see section
28354 \begin_inset space ~
28358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28360 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28365 The available options are listed and explained in
28366 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28368 key "makeindex,xindy"
28373 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28377 \begin_layout Standard
28378 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28379 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28382 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28383 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28387 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28388 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28391 \begin_layout Subsection
28395 \begin_layout Standard
28396 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28397 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28405 next to the standard index.
28407 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28408 that add this feature.
28415 \begin_inset Index idx
28418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28420 -packages ! splitidx
28425 package to generate multiple indexes.
28426 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28432 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28434 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28441 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28442 style, but it also includes
28443 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28444 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28452 \begin_layout Standard
28453 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28454 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28456 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28457 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28460 and select the option
28462 Use multiple Indexes
28469 already contains the standard index
28470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28478 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28479 also appear as a heading) to the
28483 input field and press the
28488 The new index now also appears in the list.
28489 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28490 label color to the new index.
28493 \begin_layout Standard
28494 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28497 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28504 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28505 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28506 are additional features:
28509 \begin_layout Itemize
28510 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28511 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28514 \begin_layout Itemize
28515 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28516 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28524 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28525 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28526 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28527 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28530 \begin_layout Section
28531 Nomenclature/Glossary
28532 \begin_inset Index idx
28535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28542 \begin_inset Index idx
28545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28576 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28583 \begin_layout Standard
28584 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28585 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28586 called nomenclature or glossary.
28589 \begin_layout Standard
28590 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28597 \begin_inset Index idx
28600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28602 -packages ! nomencl
28608 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28610 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28616 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28620 \begin_layout Standard
28621 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28622 and then use the menu
28624 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28630 \begin_inset space ~
28635 or the toolbar button
28638 arg "nomencl-insert"
28643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28654 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28657 \begin_layout Standard
28658 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28659 The first is the term or
28663 that you wish to define.
28668 of the term or symbol.
28671 \begin_layout Standard
28672 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28680 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28681 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28689 \begin_layout Subsection
28690 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28691 \begin_inset Index idx
28694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28695 Nomenclature ! Layout
28703 \begin_layout Standard
28704 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28708 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28715 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28723 \begin_inset Newline newline
28731 \begin_inset Newline newline
28737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28744 character starts/ends the formula.
28745 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28746 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28758 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28768 \begin_layout Standard
28769 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28770 -syntax is given in section
28771 \begin_inset space ~
28775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28777 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28784 \begin_layout Standard
28788 \begin_inset space ~
28793 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28795 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28800 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28807 in this document is:
28808 \begin_inset Newline newline
28813 dummy entry for the character
28818 \begin_inset Newline newline
28830 \begin_inset space ~
28840 font use the command
28869 \begin_layout Standard
28870 If the characters |
28871 \begin_inset space \space{}
28875 \begin_inset space \space{}
28879 \begin_inset space \space{}
28883 \begin_inset space \space{}
28887 \begin_inset space \space{}
28890 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28891 a quote character in front of them.
28892 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28893 LatexCommand nomenclature
28894 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28895 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28902 \begin_layout Subsection
28903 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28904 \begin_inset Index idx
28907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28908 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28916 \begin_layout Standard
28917 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28918 -code of the symbol
28920 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28922 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28925 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28926 LatexCommand nomenclature
28928 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28935 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28939 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28940 LatexCommand nomenclature
28943 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28948 They will be sorted by
28949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28975 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28978 will be sorted before the
28982 since the character
28983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28990 is considered in sorting.
28993 \begin_layout Standard
28994 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28997 \begin_inset space ~
29002 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29003 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29005 For the example given, you can insert
29009 in this field for the
29010 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29017 will be located before
29018 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29024 \begin_layout Standard
29025 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29030 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29039 \begin_layout Subsection
29040 Nomenclature Options
29041 \begin_inset Index idx
29044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29045 Nomenclature ! Options
29053 \begin_layout Standard
29058 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29059 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29062 \begin_layout Description
29063 refeq Appends the phrase
29064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29079 to every nomenclature entry, where
29085 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29088 \begin_layout Description
29089 refpage Appends the phrase
29090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29105 to every nomenclature entry, where
29111 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29114 \begin_layout Description
29115 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29118 \begin_layout Standard
29119 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29120 class options list in the
29122 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29126 In this document the options
29133 \begin_layout Standard
29134 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29140 \begin_layout Standard
29141 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29142 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29147 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29150 \begin_layout Description
29160 \begin_layout Description
29163 nomrefpage Like the
29170 \begin_layout Description
29173 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29182 \begin_layout Description
29186 \begin_inset space ~
29192 \begin_inset space ~
29197 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29200 \begin_layout Standard
29202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29209 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29210 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29214 \begin_layout Standard
29222 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29225 \begin_inset Newline newline
29232 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29237 \begin_inset Newline newline
29241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29256 by their translation.
29259 \begin_layout Subsection
29260 Printing the Nomenclature
29261 \begin_inset Index idx
29264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29265 Nomenclature ! Printing
29273 \begin_layout Standard
29274 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29277 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29293 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29294 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29295 You can choose between these settings:
29298 \begin_layout Description
29299 Default a space of 1
29300 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29306 \begin_layout Description
29308 \begin_inset space ~
29312 \begin_inset space ~
29315 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29318 \begin_layout Description
29319 Custom custom space
29322 \begin_layout Standard
29323 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29332 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29340 For example, in order to change the name to
29344 , add the following line to the preamble:
29347 \begin_layout Standard
29355 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29358 \begin_layout Subsection
29359 Nomenclature Program
29360 \begin_inset Index idx
29363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29364 Nomenclature ! Program
29370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29372 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29379 \begin_layout Standard
29385 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29386 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29388 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29393 by adding options, see section
29394 \begin_inset space ~
29398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29400 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29405 The available options are listed and explained in
29406 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29408 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29415 \begin_layout Section
29417 \begin_inset Index idx
29420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29427 \begin_inset Index idx
29430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29431 Document ! Branches
29437 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29439 name "sec:Branches"
29446 \begin_layout Standard
29447 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29448 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29449 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29450 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29453 \begin_layout Standard
29454 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29455 allows you to put text into branches.
29456 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29457 To create a branch, either select the menu
29459 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29460 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29463 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29465 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29472 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29473 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29474 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29475 and whether the name of the branch should
29476 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29477 (see below for an example).
29478 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29479 to the name of the other) and to add
29480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29492 \begin_inset space ~
29495 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29496 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29499 \begin_layout Standard
29500 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29501 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29503 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29506 where you can choose a branch.
29507 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29511 \begin_layout Standard
29512 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29513 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29516 \begin_layout Standard
29517 \begin_inset Branch Question
29520 \begin_layout Standard
29521 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29529 \begin_layout Standard
29530 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29533 \begin_layout Standard
29534 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29542 \begin_layout Standard
29549 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29550 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29553 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29554 Consider for example a file
29555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29562 which has the above branches.
29564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29571 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29595 branch were inactive,
29596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29611 branch was active, likewise
29612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29627 branch was active, and
29628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29631 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29635 if both branches were active.
29636 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29639 \begin_layout Standard
29640 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29646 \begin_layout Standard
29647 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29648 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29649 definitions for each branch.
29650 For example you can define for the question branch
29654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29655 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29656 -syntax, see section
29657 \begin_inset space ~
29661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29663 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29675 \begin_layout Standard
29685 \begin_layout Standard
29695 \begin_layout Standard
29696 and for the answer branch
29699 \begin_layout Standard
29709 \begin_layout Standard
29719 \begin_layout Standard
29720 \begin_inset Branch Question
29723 \begin_layout Standard
29727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29755 \begin_layout Standard
29756 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29759 \begin_layout Standard
29763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29791 \begin_layout Standard
29792 Now it is possible to use the
29796 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29803 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29806 commands to obtain conditional output.
29807 Here is an example formula where only the
29814 \begin_inset Formula
29816 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29824 \begin_layout Standard
29825 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29833 \begin_layout Standard
29834 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29836 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29840 \begin_inset space \space{}
29843 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29845 For this advanced usage, see the
29850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29853 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29860 \begin_layout Section
29862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29864 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29869 \begin_inset Index idx
29872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29881 \begin_layout Standard
29884 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29885 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29888 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29890 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29896 \begin_inset Index idx
29899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29901 -packages ! hyperref
29906 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29907 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29908 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29909 part of the document.
29913 \begin_layout Standard
29914 The header information in the dialog tab
29918 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29919 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29920 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29921 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29925 \begin_inset space ~
29929 \begin_inset space ~
29934 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
29935 tries to extract the header information from your document title
29936 and author entries.
29940 \begin_inset space ~
29944 \begin_inset space ~
29948 \begin_inset space ~
29953 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29956 \begin_layout Standard
29957 You can specify in the dialog tab
29961 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29966 \begin_inset space ~
29970 \begin_inset space ~
29974 \begin_inset space ~
29979 option allows long links to be split;
29982 \begin_inset space ~
29986 \begin_inset space ~
29990 \begin_inset space ~
29998 \begin_inset space ~
30003 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30006 \begin_inset space ~
30011 colors the different links.
30012 The default colors are:
30015 \begin_layout Labeling
30016 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30021 for hyperlinks and URLs
30024 \begin_layout Labeling
30025 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30033 \begin_layout Labeling
30034 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30042 \begin_layout Standard
30043 but you can change these in the field
30048 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30051 \begin_layout Standard
30054 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30057 \begin_layout Standard
30062 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30063 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30064 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30067 \begin_layout Standard
30072 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30073 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30074 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30084 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30085 when opening the PDF.
30087 \begin_inset space ~
30090 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30091 \begin_inset space ~
30094 1 will only display the sections.
30097 \begin_layout Standard
30098 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30099 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30105 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30106 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30115 \begin_layout Section
30117 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30121 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30128 \begin_layout Subsection
30131 \begin_inset Index idx
30134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30144 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30151 \begin_layout Standard
30152 As \SpecialChar LyX
30153 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30154 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30155 commands and constructs,
30158 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30159 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30160 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30161 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30162 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30163 cannot support all packages and
30167 \begin_layout Standard
30168 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30169 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30170 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30174 Code box is created by the menu
30176 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30178 \begin_inset space ~
30183 or by the toolbar button
30196 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30204 \begin_layout Standard
30205 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30207 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30209 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30210 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30217 , you can write the command part
30223 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30224 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30228 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30229 Code box behind the word.
30230 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30231 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30235 \begin_layout Standard
30236 \begin_inset Graphics
30237 filename clipart/ERT.png
30245 \begin_layout Standard
30249 \begin_layout Standard
30250 This is a line with a
30254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30277 \begin_layout Standard
30278 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30286 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30287 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30288 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30289 know that the command is finished.
30297 \begin_layout Subsection
30298 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30300 \begin_inset Argument 1
30303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30304 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30311 \begin_inset Index idx
30314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30324 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30331 \begin_layout Standard
30332 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30333 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30334 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30335 uses in the background.
30336 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30337 is based on commands, you can
30338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30346 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30347 any time if you know the right commands.
30348 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30349 is the end of the day.
30350 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30351 all caption labels bold.
30352 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30354 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30358 \begin_layout Standard
30359 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30361 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30363 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30366 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30375 \begin_layout Standard
30376 As result you find that the package
30381 \begin_inset Index idx
30384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30386 -packages ! caption
30392 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30394 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30397 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30401 \begin_inset space ~
30409 \begin_layout Standard
30414 usepackage[options]{package name}
30417 \begin_layout Standard
30418 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30419 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30420 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30421 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30424 \begin_layout Standard
30425 In your case the package name is
30430 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30435 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30436 So you add the command
30439 \begin_layout Standard
30444 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30447 \begin_layout Standard
30448 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30453 For more commands provided by the
30457 package, have a look at its documentation,
30458 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30472 \begin_layout Standard
30473 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30475 For example if you use a
30479 class, you don't need the package
30483 , you can instead write
30486 \begin_layout Standard
30491 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30496 \begin_layout Standard
30497 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30498 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30499 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30506 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30509 \begin_layout Standard
30510 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30511 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30513 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30514 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30515 Code box as described in the previous
30519 \begin_layout Standard
30520 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30521 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30524 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30526 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30533 \begin_layout Standard
30534 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30540 \begin_layout Standard
30544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30554 \begin_inset Note Note
30557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30558 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30566 \begin_layout Left Header
30567 \begin_inset Argument 1
30570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30590 \begin_inset Note Note
30593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30594 defines the header line as described below
30602 \begin_layout Center Header
30603 \begin_inset Argument 1
30606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30615 \begin_layout Right Header
30616 \begin_inset Argument 1
30619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30640 \begin_layout Left Footer
30641 \begin_inset Argument 1
30644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30665 \begin_layout Center Footer
30666 \begin_inset Argument 1
30669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30681 \begin_inset Newline newline
30685 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30691 \begin_layout Right Footer
30692 \begin_inset Argument 1
30695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30717 \begin_layout Section
30718 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30719 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30721 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30726 \begin_inset Index idx
30729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30730 Document ! Header/Footer line
30736 \begin_inset Index idx
30739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30748 \begin_layout Standard
30749 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30753 \begin_inset space ~
30764 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30770 \begin_inset space ~
30776 As a second step add in the menu
30778 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30779 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30786 Custom Header/Footerlines
30787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30791 This module offers the following 6
30792 \begin_inset space ~
30798 \begin_layout Description
30800 \begin_inset space ~
30804 \begin_inset space ~
30808 \begin_inset space ~
30812 \begin_inset space ~
30816 \begin_inset space ~
30822 \begin_layout Description
30824 \begin_inset space ~
30828 \begin_inset space ~
30832 \begin_inset space ~
30836 \begin_inset space ~
30840 \begin_inset space ~
30846 \begin_layout Standard
30847 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30850 \begin_layout Standard
30851 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30852 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30854 \begin_inset space ~
30858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30860 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30864 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30867 \begin_layout Standard
30868 \begin_inset Float figure
30874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30877 \begin_inset Tabular
30878 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30879 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30880 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30881 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30882 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30884 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30902 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30913 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30931 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30942 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30946 The normal text on the page goes here.
30947 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30949 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30950 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30955 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30964 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30975 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30993 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31004 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31022 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31040 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31045 name "fig:Page-layout"
31049 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31062 \begin_layout Standard
31063 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31071 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31075 \begin_inset space ~
31080 is set to “Default”.
31081 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31090 \begin_layout Subsection
31094 \begin_layout Standard
31095 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31096 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31097 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31098 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31100 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31101 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31104 \begin_layout Standard
31105 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31106 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31110 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31112 \begin_inset space ~
31120 \begin_layout Description
31123 thepage prints the current page number
31126 \begin_layout Description
31129 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31132 \begin_layout Description
31135 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31138 \begin_layout Description
31141 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31142 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31149 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31152 because it usually goes in a left header.
31155 \begin_layout Description
31158 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31159 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31161 It is normally used in the right header.
31164 \begin_layout Subsection
31165 Default header/footer
31168 \begin_layout Standard
31169 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31170 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31171 footer has the page number.
31172 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31173 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31174 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31177 \begin_inset space ~
31185 \begin_layout Subsection
31189 \begin_layout Standard
31190 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31191 Some pages are different.
31192 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31193 a new part or chapter in your book.
31194 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31195 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31196 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31200 Header and footer decoration line
31203 \begin_layout Standard
31204 By default, you get a 0.4
31205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31208 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31209 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31221 in the following way:
31224 \begin_layout Standard
31231 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31234 \begin_layout Standard
31235 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31244 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31251 \begin_layout Standard
31252 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31254 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31255 \begin_inset space ~
31259 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31268 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31269 Several header/footer lines
31272 \begin_layout Standard
31273 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31274 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31275 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31277 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31292 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31293 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31306 \begin_inset space ~
31314 \begin_layout Standard
31321 headheight}{height}
31324 \begin_layout Standard
31325 where height is a size in standard units.
31326 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31327 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31328 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31329 logfile with the menu
31331 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31337 \begin_inset space ~
31342 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31347 \begin_inset Index idx
31350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31352 -packages ! fancyhdr
31358 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31359 for your header/footer.
31362 \begin_layout Subsection
31366 \begin_layout Standard
31367 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31368 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31369 This example consists of the following definition:
31372 \begin_layout Description
31374 \begin_inset space ~
31383 , empty optional argument
31386 \begin_layout Description
31388 \begin_inset space ~
31391 Header empty, empty optional argument
31394 \begin_layout Description
31396 \begin_inset space ~
31405 in the optional argument
31408 \begin_layout Description
31410 \begin_inset space ~
31419 in the optional argument
31422 \begin_layout Description
31424 \begin_inset space ~
31437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31441 \begin_inset Newline newline
31445 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31452 in the optional argument
31455 \begin_layout Description
31457 \begin_inset space ~
31466 , empty optional argument
31469 \begin_layout Description
31472 headrulewidth set to 2
31473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31479 \begin_layout Standard
31480 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31481 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31487 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31496 \begin_layout Standard
31497 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31503 \begin_layout Standard
31507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31511 pagestyle{headings}
31517 \begin_inset Note Note
31520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31521 switches back to page style with the default headings
31529 \begin_layout Section
31530 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31533 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31538 \begin_inset Index idx
31541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31548 \begin_inset Index idx
31551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31560 \begin_layout Standard
31562 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31563 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31564 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31567 \begin_layout Subsection
31571 \begin_layout Standard
31572 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31578 \begin_inset Index idx
31581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31583 -packages ! preview-latex
31588 (on some systems named simply
31593 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31595 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31601 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31603 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31611 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31612 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31613 -package are automatically
31614 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31618 \begin_layout Subsection
31622 \begin_layout Standard
31623 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31624 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31626 activate the option
31629 \begin_inset space ~
31636 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31642 \begin_inset space ~
31646 \begin_inset space ~
31649 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31656 \begin_inset space ~
31669 \begin_inset space ~
31674 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31677 \begin_layout Standard
31678 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31683 \begin_inset space ~
31691 \begin_inset space ~
31699 \begin_layout Standard
31700 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31701 and when you finish
31705 \begin_layout Standard
31706 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31714 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31715 generated by activating the option
31718 \begin_inset space ~
31724 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31732 \begin_layout Subsection
31733 Selected document parts
31736 \begin_layout Standard
31737 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31738 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31739 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31740 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31742 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31744 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31748 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31749 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31750 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31753 \begin_layout Standard
31754 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31761 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31773 is explained in section
31775 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31780 \begin_inset space ~
31790 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31791 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31792 the final rotated boxes,
31793 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31794 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31796 Here is the result:
31799 \begin_layout Standard
31800 \begin_inset Preview
31802 \begin_layout Standard
31807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31811 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31817 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31827 height_special "totalheight"
31832 backgroundcolor "none"
31835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31860 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31866 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31888 \begin_layout Standard
31889 Previewing works also for colors.
31890 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31909 is explained in section
31916 \begin_inset space ~
31929 \begin_layout Standard
31930 \begin_inset Preview
31932 \begin_layout Standard
31936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31955 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31960 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31979 \begin_layout Standard
31980 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31986 \begin_layout Standard
31987 If \SpecialChar LyX
31988 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31989 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
31990 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
31991 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31992 packages in your document preamble that are required by
31993 the \SpecialChar TeX
31995 If \SpecialChar LyX
31996 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
31997 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
31999 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32000 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32001 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32004 \begin_layout Subsection
32009 \begin_layout Standard
32010 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32011 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32014 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32016 \begin_inset space ~
32021 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32023 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32025 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32026 's main window, then only this selection
32027 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32028 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32029 the source view window.
32034 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32035 ; but note that if you have
32036 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32038 not just the one which is open at the time.
32041 \begin_layout Section
32042 Advanced Find and Replace
32043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32045 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32050 \begin_inset Index idx
32053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32060 \begin_inset Index idx
32063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32072 \begin_layout Subsection
32076 \begin_layout Standard
32077 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32078 allows for searching of complex,
32079 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32081 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32082 The key-features are:
32085 \begin_layout Itemize
32086 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32087 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32088 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32092 \begin_layout Itemize
32093 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32094 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32095 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32096 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32099 \begin_layout Itemize
32100 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32101 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32102 outside of mathematics environments
32105 \begin_layout Itemize
32106 Search may be widened to a specific
32111 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32115 \begin_inset space ~
32118 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32119 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32126 \begin_layout Itemize
32127 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32128 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32133 \begin_inset space ~
32136 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32139 \begin_layout Subsection
32143 \begin_layout Standard
32144 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32146 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32159 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32162 ) or the toolbar button
32165 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32171 Advanced Find and Replace
32176 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32180 \begin_layout Standard
32186 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32190 \begin_inset space ~
32195 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32198 arg "paragraph-break"
32202 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32203 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32207 arg "paragraph-break"
32210 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32214 searches backwards.
32217 \begin_layout Standard
32221 \begin_inset space ~
32226 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32235 \begin_inset space ~
32240 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32243 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32244 Searching for mathematics
32247 \begin_layout Standard
32248 Mathematical formulas, such as
32249 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32252 or something more complex like
32253 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32256 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32261 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32262 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32263 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32264 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32270 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32274 \begin_layout Standard
32275 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32276 This is done by switching to the
32280 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32285 This way, entering in the
32292 \begin_layout Itemize
32293 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32294 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32297 \begin_layout Itemize
32298 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32299 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32302 \begin_layout Itemize
32303 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32304 of it only within section headings.
32305 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32306 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32310 \begin_layout Itemize
32311 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32312 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32315 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32319 \begin_layout Standard
32320 The entries made in the
32324 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32327 \begin_inset space ~
32333 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32337 button or alternatively press
32340 arg "paragraph-break"
32347 while the cursor is in the
32350 \begin_inset space ~
32358 \begin_layout Standard
32359 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32361 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32365 \begin_layout Itemize
32366 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32367 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32375 with its typewriter version
32376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32390 \begin_layout Itemize
32391 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32397 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32409 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32416 (you may want to enable the
32419 \begin_inset space ~
32427 \begin_inset space ~
32432 options and disable the
32440 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32448 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32449 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32453 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32456 , or occurrences of
32457 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32461 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32467 \begin_layout Subsection
32471 \begin_layout Standard
32472 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32477 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32479 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32481 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32490 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32496 This is done with the context menu
32498 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32499 Insert Regular Expression
32501 while the cursor is in the
32506 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32507 expression matching rules
32511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32512 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32519 \begin_inset space ~
32522 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32523 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32529 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32530 same text in the document.
32531 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32532 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32535 \begin_layout Enumerate
32536 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32541 editor the fraction
32542 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32546 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32549 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32550 fractions with the given denominator.
32553 \begin_layout Enumerate
32554 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32566 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32571 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32572 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32573 Also, by inserting a
32574 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32577 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32578 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32581 \begin_layout Standard
32582 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32583 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32584 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32587 , and referring back to them through
32588 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32592 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32596 For example, try searching with the regexp
32597 \begin_inset Newline newline
32600 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32603 \begin_inset Newline newline
32606 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32609 \begin_layout Standard
32610 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32613 \begin_layout Standard
32614 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32622 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32623 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32624 sub-expressions is absolute.
32626 \begin_inset space ~
32630 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32633 always refers to the first occurrence of
32634 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32637 in all entered regexps.
32645 \begin_layout Section
32647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32649 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32654 \begin_inset Index idx
32657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32666 \begin_layout Standard
32668 has a built-in spell checker.
32671 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32678 key or the toolbar button
32681 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32684 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32685 beginning of the currently selected text.
32686 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32687 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32688 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32689 scrolled so that it is visible.
32690 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32691 n, if any could be found.
32692 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32696 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32697 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32700 \begin_layout Standard
32701 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32704 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32708 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32709 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32711 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32712 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32715 \begin_inset space ~
32723 arg "dialog-show character"
32726 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32728 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32731 \begin_layout Standard
32732 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32733 can be downloaded from here:
32734 \begin_inset Newline newline
32738 \begin_inset Flex URL
32741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32743 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32749 \begin_inset Newline newline
32753 \begin_inset space ~
32756 files for each language.
32757 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32758 \begin_inset space ~
32761 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32762 's installation subfolder
32770 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32772 \begin_inset Newline newline
32775 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32776 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32777 but in most cases these are
32793 is the language code.
32796 \begin_layout Subsection
32800 \begin_layout Standard
32803 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32804 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32806 \begin_inset space ~
32809 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32812 you can set the following things:
32815 \begin_layout Description
32817 \begin_inset space ~
32820 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32821 should use for spell checking.
32822 Depending on your platform,
32836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32837 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32838 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32853 \begin_inset space ~
32856 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
32859 \begin_layout Description
32861 \begin_inset space ~
32864 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32865 will always use the given language
32866 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32869 \begin_layout Description
32871 \begin_inset space ~
32874 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32876 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32880 \begin_inset space \space{}
32884 This should normally not be needed.
32887 \begin_layout Description
32889 \begin_inset space ~
32893 \begin_inset space ~
32896 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32908 \begin_layout Description
32910 \begin_inset space ~
32913 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32914 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32915 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32916 appear in a context menu.
32917 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32921 \begin_layout Description
32923 \begin_inset space ~
32927 \begin_inset space ~
32931 \begin_inset space ~
32934 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32938 \begin_layout Section
32940 \begin_inset Index idx
32943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32952 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32959 \begin_layout Standard
32961 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32962 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32972 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32974 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32983 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
32985 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
32986 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32987 which are available for many languages.
32990 \begin_layout Standard
32991 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32992 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
32996 \begin_layout Subsection
32997 Setting up the thesaurus
33000 \begin_layout Standard
33009 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33013 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33018 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33024 \begin_inset space ~
33032 For instance, the US English files are named:
33035 \begin_layout Itemize
33039 \begin_layout Itemize
33043 \begin_layout Standard
33052 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33053 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33056 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33057 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33058 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33060 \begin_inset space ~
33065 ) to the path where they are installed.
33069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33070 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33071 ies, typical locations are
33077 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33081 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33085 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33088 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33094 LibreOffice-<Version>
33101 On the Mac, the default location is
33103 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33104 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33105 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33106 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33107 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33108 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33116 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33117 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33118 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33122 \begin_layout Standard
33123 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33124 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33128 \begin_layout Itemize
33129 \begin_inset Flex URL
33132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33134 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33142 \begin_layout Standard
33143 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33144 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33146 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33147 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33148 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33150 \begin_inset space ~
33155 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33157 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33158 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33162 \begin_layout Standard
33163 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33165 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33168 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33174 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33177 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33178 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33186 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33187 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33188 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33190 \begin_inset space ~
33195 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33198 \begin_layout Subsection
33199 Using the thesaurus
33202 \begin_layout Standard
33203 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33205 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33208 or the toolbar button
33211 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33214 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33216 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33218 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33219 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33220 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33229 ), related terms (such as
33232 \begin_inset space ~
33241 ), compounds (such as
33244 \begin_inset space ~
33253 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33262 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33265 \begin_layout Standard
33266 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33267 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33271 \begin_layout Standard
33272 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33273 the dictionary, such as the above
33277 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33282 \begin_inset space \space{}
33285 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33286 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33287 For example, looking up the word form
33291 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33296 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33301 \begin_inset space \space{}
33312 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33313 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33314 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33317 \begin_layout Section
33319 \begin_inset Index idx
33322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33329 \begin_inset Index idx
33332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33333 Document ! Change Tracking
33339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33341 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33348 \begin_layout Standard
33349 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33350 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33351 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33352 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33354 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33356 \begin_inset space ~
33359 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33361 \begin_inset space ~
33369 \begin_layout Standard
33370 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33384 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33385 You can change the color in
33387 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33388 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33390 \begin_inset space ~
33394 \begin_inset space ~
33399 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33405 \begin_inset Index idx
33408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33409 Color ! Change tracking
33414 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33415 's status bar when the
33416 cursor is in changed text.
33417 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33420 arg "changes-merge"
33426 \begin_layout Standard
33427 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33429 \begin_inset Index idx
33432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33441 \begin_layout Standard
33442 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33448 \begin_layout Standard
33449 \begin_inset Graphics
33450 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33458 \begin_layout Standard
33459 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33465 \begin_layout Standard
33466 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33469 \begin_layout Standard
33470 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33476 \begin_layout Standard
33477 \begin_inset Tabular
33478 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33479 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33480 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33481 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33482 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33491 arg "changes-track"
33499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33505 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33507 \begin_inset space ~
33510 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33512 \begin_inset space ~
33521 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33530 arg "changes-output"
33538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33544 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33546 \begin_inset space ~
33549 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33551 \begin_inset space ~
33555 \begin_inset space ~
33559 \begin_inset space ~
33568 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33589 Jumps to the next change
33595 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33604 arg "change-accept"
33612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33618 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33620 \begin_inset space ~
33623 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33625 \begin_inset space ~
33634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33643 arg "change-reject"
33651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33657 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33659 \begin_inset space ~
33662 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33664 \begin_inset space ~
33673 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33682 arg "changes-merge"
33690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33696 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33698 \begin_inset space ~
33701 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33703 \begin_inset space ~
33712 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33721 arg "all-changes-accept"
33729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33735 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33737 \begin_inset space ~
33740 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33742 \begin_inset space ~
33746 \begin_inset space ~
33755 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33764 arg "all-changes-reject"
33772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33778 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33780 \begin_inset space ~
33783 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33785 \begin_inset space ~
33789 \begin_inset space ~
33798 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33821 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33822 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33824 \begin_inset space ~
33833 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33856 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33858 \begin_inset space ~
33874 \begin_layout Standard
33875 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33881 \begin_layout Standard
33882 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33902 \begin_layout Standard
33903 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33904 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33905 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33906 the next change after the current cursor position.
33907 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33908 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33909 step to the next change.
33910 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33913 \begin_layout Standard
33914 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33915 to describe a change.
33918 \begin_layout Standard
33919 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33925 \begin_inset Index idx
33928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33930 -packages ! dvipost
33936 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33938 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33944 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33948 \begin_layout Section
33949 Comparison of Documents
33950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33952 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33957 \begin_inset Index idx
33960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33961 Comparison of documents
33969 \begin_layout Standard
33970 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
33973 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33977 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
33978 file with change tracking enabled showing the
33980 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
33982 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33986 \begin_inset space ~
33990 \begin_inset space ~
33994 \begin_inset space ~
34003 \begin_inset space ~
34007 \begin_inset space ~
34011 \begin_inset space ~
34015 \begin_inset space ~
34019 \begin_inset space ~
34023 \begin_inset space ~
34028 enables the change tracking option
34031 \begin_inset space ~
34035 \begin_inset space ~
34039 \begin_inset space ~
34044 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34047 \begin_layout Section
34048 International Support
34049 \begin_inset Index idx
34052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34053 International support
34061 \begin_layout Standard
34062 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34063 with any language you want.
34064 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34065 up \SpecialChar LyX
34067 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34069 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34076 \begin_layout Standard
34077 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34078 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34079 \begin_inset space ~
34083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34085 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34092 \begin_layout Subsection
34094 \begin_inset Index idx
34097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34104 \begin_inset Index idx
34107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34108 Document ! Settings
34114 \begin_inset Index idx
34117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34118 Document ! Language
34126 \begin_layout Standard
34129 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34130 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34133 dialog lets you set
34135 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34140 \begin_layout Standard
34145 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34150 \begin_inset space ~
34155 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34156 For details about the different encoding options see section
34157 \begin_inset space ~
34161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34163 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34170 \begin_layout Subsection
34171 Keyboard mapping configuration
34172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34174 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34181 \begin_layout Standard
34182 If you have for example a U.
34183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34186 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34187 can use an alternate keymap.
34188 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34193 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34194 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34195 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34198 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34199 \begin_inset space ~
34203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34205 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34210 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34211 which one you want to use.
34214 \begin_layout Standard
34215 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34216 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34217 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34221 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34222 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34223 one to support the characters you want.
34224 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34231 \begin_layout Chapter
34234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34236 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34243 \begin_layout Standard
34244 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34245 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34246 topic inside the user's guide.
34249 \begin_layout Section
34251 \begin_inset Index idx
34254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34263 \begin_layout Standard
34268 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34271 \begin_layout Subsection
34275 \begin_layout Standard
34276 Creates a new document.
34279 \begin_layout Subsection
34283 \begin_layout Standard
34284 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34285 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34286 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34289 \begin_layout Subsection
34293 \begin_layout Standard
34297 \begin_layout Subsection
34301 \begin_layout Standard
34302 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34303 Click there on a file to open it.
34306 \begin_layout Subsection
34310 \begin_layout Standard
34311 Closes the current document.
34314 \begin_layout Subsection
34318 \begin_layout Standard
34319 Closes all opened documents.
34322 \begin_layout Subsection
34326 \begin_layout Standard
34327 Saves the actual document.
34330 \begin_layout Subsection
34334 \begin_layout Standard
34335 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34338 \begin_layout Subsection
34342 \begin_layout Standard
34343 Saves all opened documents.
34346 \begin_layout Subsection
34350 \begin_layout Standard
34351 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34354 \begin_layout Subsection
34358 \begin_layout Standard
34359 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34360 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34361 It is described in the section
34363 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34368 Additional Features
34373 \begin_layout Subsection
34377 \begin_layout Standard
34378 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34379 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34381 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34382 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34386 \begin_layout Standard
34387 When using the menu entry
34390 \begin_inset space ~
34395 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34399 \begin_inset space ~
34403 \begin_inset space ~
34407 \begin_inset space ~
34412 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34413 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34416 \begin_layout Subsection
34418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34420 name "subsec:Export"
34427 \begin_layout Standard
34428 You can export your document to various file formats.
34429 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34431 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34432 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34433 during its configuration.
34436 \begin_layout Standard
34437 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34439 \begin_inset space ~
34443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34445 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34452 \begin_layout Description
34458 \begin_inset space ~
34461 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34463 \begin_inset space ~
34466 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34467 \begin_inset Newline newline
34470 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34471 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34475 \begin_layout Description
34476 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34482 \begin_layout Description
34484 \begin_inset space ~
34487 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34493 \begin_layout Description
34494 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34495 's native DVI-format.
34496 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34497 files paths or file names in your document.
34499 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34506 \begin_layout Description
34507 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34508 in files paths or file names
34511 \begin_layout Description
34513 \begin_inset space ~
34520 ) DVI-format using the program
34522 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34525 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34529 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34537 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34545 \begin_layout Description
34547 \begin_inset space ~
34550 (cropped) the same as
34554 but with cropped page margins.
34557 \begin_layout Description
34559 \begin_inset space ~
34562 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34566 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34571 \begin_layout Description
34575 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34583 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34591 \begin_layout Description
34593 \begin_inset space ~
34597 \begin_inset space ~
34600 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34604 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34612 \begin_layout Description
34616 \begin_inset space ~
34625 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34626 source that is compilable with the program
34628 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34632 \begin_layout Description
34636 \begin_inset space ~
34641 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34642 source, additionally all images used in the document
34643 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34647 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34650 \begin_layout Description
34654 \begin_inset space ~
34659 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34660 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34661 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34669 \begin_layout Description
34673 \begin_inset space ~
34682 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34683 source that is compilable with the program
34689 \begin_layout Description
34691 \begin_inset space ~
34695 \begin_inset space ~
34702 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34703 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34709 \begin_layout Description
34711 \begin_inset space ~
34714 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34715 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34717 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34721 \begin_inset space \space{}
34726 \begin_inset space ~
34730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34745 represent the version number)
34748 \begin_layout Description
34750 \begin_inset space ~
34754 \begin_inset space ~
34757 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34758 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34759 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34763 \begin_layout Description
34764 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34765 's internal XHTML engine
34768 \begin_layout Description
34769 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34774 \begin_layout Description
34775 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34777 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34780 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34784 \begin_layout Description
34786 \begin_inset space ~
34789 (cropped) the same as
34792 \begin_inset space ~
34797 but with cropped page margins
34800 \begin_layout Description
34804 \begin_inset space ~
34809 PDF-format using the program
34813 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34816 \begin_layout Description
34820 \begin_inset space ~
34824 \begin_inset space ~
34832 \begin_inset space ~
34837 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34842 \begin_inset space \space{}
34845 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34849 \begin_layout Description
34853 \begin_inset space ~
34858 PDF-format using the program
34860 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34863 , produces PDF-files directly
34866 \begin_layout Description
34870 \begin_inset space ~
34875 PDF-format using the program
34879 , produces PDF-files directly
34882 \begin_layout Description
34886 \begin_inset space ~
34891 PDF-format using the program
34895 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34898 \begin_layout Description
34902 \begin_inset space ~
34907 PDF-format using the program
34912 , produces PDF-files directly
34915 \begin_layout Description
34919 \begin_inset space ~
34927 \begin_layout Description
34931 \begin_inset space ~
34935 \begin_inset space ~
34940 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34941 and then exported as text using the program
34946 \begin_layout Description
34951 PostScript format using the program
34956 \begin_layout Description
34957 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34958 source and also code in the statistical programming
34972 it is possible to use
34976 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
34980 \begin_layout Standard
34981 If one of the menu entries
34988 \begin_inset space ~
34997 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34999 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35001 \begin_inset space ~
35005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35007 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35012 \begin_inset Index idx
35015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35016 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35025 \begin_layout Subsection
35029 \begin_layout Standard
35030 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35031 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35034 \begin_inset space ~
35038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35040 reference "sec:Paths"
35045 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35054 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35055 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35056 's preferences as described in section
35057 \begin_inset space ~
35061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35063 reference "subsec:Converters"
35070 \begin_layout Subsection
35071 New and Close Window
35074 \begin_layout Standard
35075 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35079 \begin_layout Subsection
35083 \begin_layout Standard
35084 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35087 \begin_layout Section
35089 \begin_inset Index idx
35092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35101 \begin_layout Subsection
35105 \begin_layout Standard
35106 Described in section
35107 \begin_inset space ~
35111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35113 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35120 \begin_layout Subsection
35121 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35124 \begin_layout Standard
35125 Described in section
35126 \begin_inset space ~
35130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35132 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35139 \begin_layout Subsection
35143 \begin_layout Standard
35144 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35145 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35148 \begin_layout Subsection
35152 \begin_layout Standard
35153 Selects the whole document.
35156 \begin_layout Subsection
35157 Find & Replace (Quick)
35160 \begin_layout Standard
35161 Described in section
35162 \begin_inset space ~
35166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35168 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35175 \begin_layout Subsection
35176 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35179 \begin_layout Standard
35180 Described in section
35181 \begin_inset space ~
35185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35187 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35194 \begin_layout Subsection
35195 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35198 \begin_layout Standard
35199 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35203 \begin_layout Subsection
35207 \begin_layout Standard
35208 Described in section
35209 \begin_inset space ~
35213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35215 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35222 \begin_layout Subsection
35224 \begin_inset Index idx
35227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35228 Paragraph ! Settings
35236 \begin_layout Standard
35237 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35238 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35242 \begin_layout Standard
35243 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35244 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35250 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35251 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35253 \begin_inset space ~
35261 \begin_layout Subsection
35265 \begin_layout Standard
35266 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35267 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35268 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35272 \begin_layout Standard
35273 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35275 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35276 The properties of tables are described in section
35277 \begin_inset space ~
35281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35283 reference "sec:Tables"
35287 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35288 \begin_inset space ~
35292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35294 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35301 \begin_layout Subsection
35302 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35305 \begin_layout Standard
35306 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35308 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35309 \begin_inset space ~
35313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35315 reference "sec:Nesting"
35320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35322 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35329 \begin_layout Subsection
35332 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35335 \begin_layout Standard
35336 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35337 nts of the same type.
35339 \begin_inset space ~
35343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35345 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35349 for an explanation.
35352 \begin_layout Section
35354 \begin_inset Index idx
35357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35366 \begin_layout Standard
35367 At the bottom of the
35371 menu the opened documents are listed.
35374 \begin_layout Subsection
35375 Open/Close all Insets
35378 \begin_layout Standard
35379 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35382 \begin_layout Subsection
35383 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35386 \begin_layout Standard
35387 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35390 \begin_layout Standard
35391 Math macros are described in the
35398 \begin_layout Subsection
35402 \begin_layout Standard
35403 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35404 \begin_inset space ~
35408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35410 reference "sec:Navigating"
35415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35417 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35424 \begin_layout Subsection
35428 \begin_layout Standard
35429 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35431 \begin_inset space ~
35435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35437 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35444 \begin_layout Subsection
35448 \begin_layout Standard
35449 Opens a window showing console messages.
35450 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35452 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35455 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35456 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35457 is processing the document.
35460 \begin_layout Subsection
35462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35464 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35469 \begin_inset Index idx
35472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35481 \begin_layout Standard
35482 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35483 All toolbars and the
35486 \begin_inset space ~
35491 can be turned on and off.
35496 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35508 \begin_inset space ~
35520 \begin_inset space ~
35525 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35529 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35536 \begin_layout Standard
35541 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35545 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35546 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35547 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35548 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35549 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35552 \begin_layout Standard
35554 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35555 \begin_inset space ~
35559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35561 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35568 \begin_layout Subsection
35572 \begin_layout Standard
35576 \begin_inset space ~
35580 \begin_inset space ~
35584 \begin_inset space ~
35588 \begin_inset space ~
35592 \begin_inset space ~
35596 \begin_inset space ~
35601 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35602 's main window vertically while
35605 \begin_inset space ~
35609 \begin_inset space ~
35613 \begin_inset space ~
35617 \begin_inset space ~
35621 \begin_inset space ~
35625 \begin_inset space ~
35630 will split it horizontally.
35631 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35632 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35633 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35634 three or more documents at the same time.
35635 To close a split view, use the menu
35638 \begin_inset space ~
35642 \begin_inset space ~
35650 \begin_layout Subsection
35654 \begin_layout Standard
35655 Closes a split view.
35658 \begin_layout Subsection
35662 \begin_layout Standard
35663 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35664 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35665 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35666 's main window fullscreen.
35667 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35668 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35671 \begin_layout Section
35673 \begin_inset Index idx
35676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35685 \begin_layout Subsection
35689 \begin_layout Standard
35690 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35691 \begin_inset space ~
35695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35697 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35708 \begin_layout Subsection
35710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35712 name "subsec:Special-Character"
35719 \begin_layout Standard
35720 Here you can insert the following characters:
35723 \begin_layout Description
35728 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35731 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35732 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35733 -packages you have installed.
35734 You can get a complete display by checking
35737 \begin_inset space ~
35743 \begin_inset Newline newline
35747 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35755 Not all characters will be visible in the
35759 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35767 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
35771 ) can display every character.
35779 \begin_layout Description
35780 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35784 \begin_layout Description
35786 \begin_inset space ~
35790 \begin_inset space ~
35793 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35794 \begin_inset space ~
35798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35800 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35807 \begin_layout Description
35809 \begin_inset space ~
35812 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35815 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35816 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35822 \begin_layout Description
35824 \begin_inset space ~
35827 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35830 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35831 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35837 \begin_layout Description
35839 \begin_inset space ~
35842 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
35846 \begin_layout Description
35848 \begin_inset space ~
35851 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
35855 \begin_layout Description
35857 \begin_inset space ~
35860 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35866 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35872 \begin_layout Description
35874 \begin_inset space ~
35877 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
35881 \begin_layout Description
35883 \begin_inset space ~
35887 \begin_inset Index idx
35890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35897 \begin_inset Index idx
35900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35901 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35906 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35907 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35909 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35915 \begin_inset Index idx
35918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35926 \begin_inset Newline newline
35929 More information about this feature can be found in the
35935 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
35941 \begin_layout Subsection
35945 \begin_layout Standard
35946 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35949 \begin_layout Description
35950 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35951 \begin_inset script superscript
35953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35962 \begin_layout Description
35963 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35964 \begin_inset script subscript
35966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35975 \begin_layout Description
35977 \begin_inset space ~
35980 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35981 \begin_inset space ~
35985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35987 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
35994 \begin_layout Description
35996 \begin_inset space ~
35999 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36000 \begin_inset space ~
36004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36006 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36013 \begin_layout Description
36015 \begin_inset space ~
36018 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36019 \begin_inset space ~
36023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36025 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36032 \begin_layout Description
36034 \begin_inset space ~
36037 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36043 \begin_inset space \space{}
36046 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36047 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36056 To insert a fraction use the command
36061 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36065 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36074 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36081 \begin_layout Description
36083 \begin_inset space ~
36086 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36087 \begin_inset space ~
36091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36093 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36100 \begin_layout Description
36102 \begin_inset space ~
36105 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36106 \begin_inset space ~
36110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36112 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36119 \begin_layout Description
36121 \begin_inset space ~
36124 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36125 \begin_inset space ~
36129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36131 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36138 \begin_layout Description
36139 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36140 \begin_inset space ~
36144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36146 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36153 \begin_layout Description
36155 \begin_inset space ~
36158 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36159 \begin_inset space ~
36163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36165 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36172 \begin_layout Description
36174 \begin_inset space ~
36177 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36178 \begin_inset space ~
36182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36184 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36191 \begin_layout Description
36193 \begin_inset space ~
36197 \begin_inset space ~
36200 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36201 \begin_inset space ~
36205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36207 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36214 \begin_layout Description
36216 \begin_inset space ~
36219 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36220 as described in section
36221 \begin_inset space ~
36225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36227 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36234 \begin_layout Description
36236 \begin_inset space ~
36239 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36240 \begin_inset space ~
36244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36246 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36253 \begin_layout Description
36255 \begin_inset space ~
36258 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36259 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36261 \begin_inset space ~
36265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36267 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36274 \begin_layout Description
36276 \begin_inset space ~
36279 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36280 \begin_inset space ~
36284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36286 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36293 \begin_layout Description
36295 \begin_inset space ~
36299 \begin_inset space ~
36302 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36303 \begin_inset space ~
36307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36309 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36316 \begin_layout Subsection
36320 \begin_layout Standard
36321 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36325 \begin_inset space ~
36346 are described in section
36347 \begin_inset space ~
36351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36353 reference "sec:toc"
36362 is described in section
36363 \begin_inset space ~
36367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36369 reference "sec:Index"
36377 is described in section
36378 \begin_inset space ~
36382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36384 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36390 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36393 is described in section
36394 \begin_inset space ~
36398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36400 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36407 \begin_layout Subsection
36411 \begin_layout Standard
36412 To insert floats, as described in section
36413 \begin_inset space ~
36417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36419 reference "sec:Floats"
36423 and in detail the chapter
36430 \begin_inset space ~
36438 \begin_layout Subsection
36442 \begin_layout Standard
36443 To insert notes, described in section
36444 \begin_inset space ~
36448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36450 reference "sec:Notes"
36457 \begin_layout Subsection
36461 \begin_layout Standard
36462 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36464 Branches are described in section
36465 \begin_inset space ~
36469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36471 reference "sec:Branches"
36478 \begin_layout Subsection
36482 \begin_layout Standard
36483 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36484 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36486 An example is the document class
36487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36494 with three custom insets.
36497 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36501 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36507 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36510 \begin_layout Subsection
36512 \begin_inset Index idx
36515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36524 \begin_layout Standard
36525 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36527 For more information see chapter
36529 External Document Parts
36532 \begin_inset space ~
36538 \begin_layout Subsection
36540 \begin_inset Index idx
36543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36552 \begin_layout Standard
36553 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36554 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36561 \begin_inset space ~
36569 \begin_layout Subsection
36573 \begin_layout Standard
36578 dialog as described in section
36579 \begin_inset space ~
36583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36585 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36592 \begin_layout Subsection
36596 \begin_layout Standard
36601 as described in section
36602 \begin_inset space ~
36606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36608 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36615 \begin_layout Subsection
36619 \begin_layout Standard
36624 as described in section
36625 \begin_inset space ~
36629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36631 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36638 \begin_layout Subsection
36640 \begin_inset Index idx
36643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36650 \begin_inset Index idx
36653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36654 Longtables ! Caption
36662 \begin_layout Standard
36663 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36664 Floats are described in section
36665 \begin_inset space ~
36669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36671 reference "sec:Floats"
36675 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36682 \begin_inset space ~
36690 \begin_layout Subsection
36694 \begin_layout Standard
36695 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36696 \begin_inset space ~
36700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36702 reference "sec:Index"
36709 \begin_layout Subsection
36713 \begin_layout Standard
36714 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36715 \begin_inset space ~
36719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36721 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36728 \begin_layout Subsection
36732 \begin_layout Standard
36733 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36734 Tables are described in section
36735 \begin_inset space ~
36739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36741 reference "sec:Tables"
36745 and in detail in the chapter
36752 \begin_inset space ~
36760 \begin_layout Subsection
36764 \begin_layout Standard
36770 Graphics are described in section
36771 \begin_inset space ~
36775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36777 reference "sec:Graphics"
36784 \begin_layout Subsection
36788 \begin_layout Standard
36789 Inserts a URL as described in section
36790 \begin_inset space ~
36794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36796 reference "subsec:URLs"
36803 \begin_layout Subsection
36807 \begin_layout Standard
36808 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36809 \begin_inset space ~
36813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36815 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36822 \begin_layout Subsection
36826 \begin_layout Standard
36827 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36828 \begin_inset space ~
36832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36834 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36841 \begin_layout Subsection
36845 \begin_layout Standard
36846 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36847 \begin_inset space ~
36851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36853 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36860 \begin_layout Subsection
36864 \begin_layout Standard
36865 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36866 title or caption of a float.
36867 Inserts a short title as described in section
36868 \begin_inset space ~
36872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36874 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36881 \begin_layout Subsection
36886 \begin_layout Standard
36887 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
36888 Code box as described in section
36889 \begin_inset space ~
36893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36895 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36902 \begin_layout Subsection
36904 \begin_inset Index idx
36907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36916 \begin_layout Standard
36917 Inserts a program listings box.
36918 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36920 Program Code Listings
36925 \begin_inset space ~
36933 \begin_layout Subsection
36937 \begin_layout Standard
36938 Inserts the actual date.
36939 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36943 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36951 \begin_inset space ~
36959 \begin_layout Subsection
36963 \begin_layout Standard
36964 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36965 \begin_inset space ~
36969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36971 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36978 \begin_layout Section
36980 \begin_inset Index idx
36983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36992 \begin_layout Standard
36993 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36994 \begin_inset space ~
36997 of the current document.
36998 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37001 \begin_layout Subsection
37005 \begin_layout Standard
37006 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37007 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37008 to jump, for example, between section
37009 \begin_inset space ~
37013 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37014 \begin_inset space ~
37017 2.5 and use the submenu
37020 \begin_inset space ~
37024 \begin_inset space ~
37031 \begin_inset space ~
37037 \begin_inset space ~
37041 \begin_inset space ~
37047 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37051 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37057 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37060 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37063 \begin_layout Standard
37064 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37068 \begin_inset space ~
37073 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37076 \begin_inset space ~
37081 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37084 \begin_layout Subsection
37085 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37088 \begin_layout Standard
37089 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37093 \begin_layout Subsection
37097 \begin_layout Standard
37098 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37099 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37100 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37104 \begin_inset space ~
37108 \begin_inset space ~
37116 \begin_layout Subsection
37120 \begin_layout Standard
37121 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37124 The \SpecialChar LyX
37125 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37127 \begin_inset space ~
37135 \begin_inset space ~
37140 manual for a detailed description.
37143 \begin_layout Section
37145 \begin_inset Index idx
37148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37157 \begin_layout Subsection
37161 \begin_layout Standard
37162 Change Tracking is described in section
37163 \begin_inset space ~
37167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37169 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37176 \begin_layout Subsection
37184 \begin_layout Standard
37185 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37186 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37187 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37189 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37190 to the clipboard or update the view.
37191 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37195 \begin_layout Subsection
37196 Start Appendix Here
37199 \begin_layout Standard
37200 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37201 as described in section
37202 \begin_inset space ~
37206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37208 reference "sec:Appendices"
37215 \begin_layout Subsection
37217 \begin_inset space ~
37223 \begin_layout Standard
37224 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37225 default output format for the document (menu
37227 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37228 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37229 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37231 \begin_inset space ~
37235 \begin_inset space ~
37241 \begin_inset space ~
37245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37247 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37251 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37254 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37255 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37257 \begin_inset space ~
37260 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37262 \begin_inset space ~
37265 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37267 \begin_inset space ~
37271 \begin_inset space ~
37277 \begin_inset space ~
37281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37283 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37287 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37288 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37290 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37291 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37293 \begin_inset space ~
37296 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37298 \begin_inset space ~
37301 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37305 \begin_inset space ~
37309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37311 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37316 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37317 when it is first configured.
37318 The default output format is
37321 \begin_inset space ~
37329 \begin_layout Subsection
37330 View (Other Formats)
37333 \begin_layout Standard
37334 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37335 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37336 actual document with an external program.
37337 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37338 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37339 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37341 All possible formats are listed in section
37342 \begin_inset space ~
37346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37348 reference "subsec:Export"
37353 You should at least see the menu entry
37358 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37360 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37362 \begin_inset space ~
37366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37368 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37373 \begin_inset Index idx
37376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37377 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37386 \begin_layout Standard
37387 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37388 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37390 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37391 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37393 \begin_inset space ~
37396 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37398 \begin_inset space ~
37401 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37405 \begin_inset space ~
37409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37411 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37416 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37417 when it is first configured.
37420 \begin_layout Subsection
37422 \begin_inset space ~
37428 \begin_layout Standard
37429 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37430 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37433 \begin_layout Subsection
37434 Update (Other Formats)
37437 \begin_layout Standard
37438 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37439 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37442 \begin_layout Subsection
37443 View Master Document
37446 \begin_layout Standard
37447 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37463 \begin_inset space ~
37468 manual for more information on this topic).
37469 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37470 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37474 \begin_inset space ~
37478 \begin_inset space ~
37483 generates the output of the whole book, while
37487 will just output the chapter alone.
37490 \begin_layout Standard
37491 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37492 in the document settings (menu
37494 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37495 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37496 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37498 \begin_inset space ~
37502 \begin_inset space ~
37508 \begin_inset space ~
37512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37514 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37518 ) or in the preferences (menu
37520 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37521 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37523 \begin_inset space ~
37526 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37528 \begin_inset space ~
37531 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37533 \begin_inset space ~
37537 \begin_inset space ~
37543 \begin_inset space ~
37547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37549 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37556 \begin_layout Subsection
37557 Update Master Document
37560 \begin_layout Standard
37561 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37577 \begin_inset space ~
37582 manual for more information on this topic).
37583 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37584 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37587 \begin_layout Standard
37588 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37589 in the document settings (menu
37591 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37592 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37593 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37595 \begin_inset space ~
37599 \begin_inset space ~
37605 \begin_inset space ~
37609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37611 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37615 ) or in the preferences (menu
37617 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37618 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37620 \begin_inset space ~
37623 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37625 \begin_inset space ~
37628 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37630 \begin_inset space ~
37634 \begin_inset space ~
37640 \begin_inset space ~
37644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37646 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37653 \begin_layout Subsection
37655 \change_inserted -195340706 1447278411
37657 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37659 name "subsec:Compressed"
37668 \begin_layout Standard
37669 Un/compresses the current document.
37671 \change_inserted -195340706 1447279328
37672 Use this if you want to save a compressed document in uncompressed format
37674 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
37677 Additional \SpecialChar LyX
37685 \begin_layout Subsection
37689 \begin_layout Standard
37690 The document settings are described in appendix
37691 \begin_inset space ~
37695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37697 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37704 \begin_layout Section
37706 \begin_inset Index idx
37709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37718 \begin_layout Subsection
37722 \begin_layout Standard
37723 Spell checking is explained in section
37724 \begin_inset space ~
37728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37730 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37737 \begin_layout Subsection
37741 \begin_layout Standard
37742 The thesaurus is described in section
37743 \begin_inset space ~
37747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37749 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37756 \begin_layout Subsection
37758 \begin_inset Index idx
37761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37768 \begin_inset Index idx
37771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37780 \begin_layout Standard
37781 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37782 the highlighted document part.
37785 \begin_layout Subsection
37791 \begin_inset Index idx
37794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37795 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37804 \begin_layout Standard
37805 Generates with the help of the program
37807 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37810 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37811 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37812 This feature is not available on Windows.
37815 \begin_layout Subsection
37821 \begin_inset Index idx
37824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37834 \begin_layout Standard
37835 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37840 \begin_inset space ~
37845 to see the full filename paths.
37848 \begin_layout Subsection
37850 \begin_inset Index idx
37853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37862 \begin_layout Standard
37863 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
37864 files as described in section
37865 \begin_inset space ~
37869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37871 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37878 \begin_layout Subsection
37880 \begin_inset Index idx
37883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37896 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37914 \begin_inset Index idx
37917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37918 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37927 \begin_layout Standard
37928 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
37929 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
37930 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37931 -packages and programs it needs; see
37933 \begin_inset space ~
37937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37939 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37946 \begin_layout Subsection
37950 \begin_layout Standard
37955 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37956 \begin_inset space ~
37960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37962 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37969 \begin_layout Section
37971 \begin_inset Index idx
37974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37983 \begin_layout Standard
37984 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
37985 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
37987 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37991 \begin_layout Standard
37996 \begin_inset space ~
38001 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38002 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38003 packages and classes found
38004 by \SpecialChar LyX
38006 \begin_inset space ~
38010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38012 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38019 \begin_layout Standard
38023 \begin_inset space ~
38028 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38033 \begin_layout Section
38035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38037 name "sec:Toolbars"
38044 \begin_layout Standard
38045 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38046 \begin_inset space ~
38050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38052 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38059 \begin_layout Standard
38060 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38061 This is described in the
38063 Additional Features
38068 \begin_layout Subsection
38070 \begin_inset Index idx
38073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38082 \begin_layout Standard
38083 \begin_inset Graphics
38084 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38092 \begin_layout Standard
38093 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38099 \begin_layout Standard
38100 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38117 \begin_inset Note Note
38120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38121 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38126 manual for more information.
38134 \begin_layout Standard
38135 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38141 \begin_layout Standard
38142 \begin_inset Tabular
38143 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38144 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38145 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38146 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38152 \begin_inset Graphics
38153 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38167 pull-down box for the environments
38180 \begin_layout Standard
38181 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38187 \begin_layout Standard
38189 \begin_inset Tabular
38190 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38191 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38192 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38193 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38194 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38217 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38224 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38247 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38254 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38277 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38284 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38293 arg "dialog-show print"
38301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38307 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38314 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38323 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38337 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38344 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38367 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38374 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38397 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38404 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38427 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38434 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38464 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38487 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38494 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38503 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38517 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38527 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38536 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38543 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38557 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38563 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38567 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38576 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38585 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38599 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38600 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38607 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38628 Emphasize text, function of the
38630 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38632 \begin_inset space ~
38635 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38644 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38665 Set text to noun style, function of the
38667 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38669 \begin_inset space ~
38672 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38681 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38690 arg "textstyle-apply"
38698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38702 Format text using the current settings in the
38704 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38706 \begin_inset space ~
38709 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38718 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38741 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38742 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38744 \begin_inset space ~
38753 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38762 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38776 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38783 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38790 arg "tabular-insert"
38798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38804 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38811 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38820 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38832 Toggle outline window on/off,
38834 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38841 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38850 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38862 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38868 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38877 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38889 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38902 \begin_layout Subsection
38904 \begin_inset Index idx
38907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38916 \begin_layout Standard
38917 \begin_inset Graphics
38918 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38926 \begin_layout Standard
38927 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38933 \begin_layout Standard
38934 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38938 \begin_layout Standard
38939 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38945 \begin_layout Standard
38946 \begin_inset Tabular
38947 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38948 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38949 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38950 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38951 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38978 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38987 arg "layout Enumerate"
38995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39005 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39014 arg "layout Itemize"
39022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39032 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39059 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39068 arg "layout Description"
39076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39086 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39095 arg "depth-increment"
39103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39109 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39111 \begin_inset space ~
39115 \begin_inset space ~
39124 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39133 arg "depth-decrement"
39141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39147 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39149 \begin_inset space ~
39153 \begin_inset space ~
39162 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39171 arg "float-insert figure"
39179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39185 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39186 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39193 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39202 arg "float-insert table"
39210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39216 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39217 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39224 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39247 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39254 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39263 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39277 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39284 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39293 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39307 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39314 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39337 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39339 \begin_inset space ~
39348 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39357 arg "nomencl-insert"
39365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39371 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39373 \begin_inset space ~
39382 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39391 arg "footnote-insert"
39399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39405 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39412 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39421 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39437 \begin_inset space ~
39446 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39469 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39470 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39472 \begin_inset space ~
39481 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39490 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39504 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39511 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39534 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39541 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39566 \begin_inset space ~
39575 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39584 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39598 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39599 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39606 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39615 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39629 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39630 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39632 \begin_inset space ~
39641 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39650 arg "dialog-show character"
39658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39664 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39666 \begin_inset space ~
39669 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39676 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39685 arg "layout-paragraph"
39693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39699 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39701 \begin_inset space ~
39710 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39719 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39733 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39747 \begin_layout Subsection
39748 View/Update Toolbar
39749 \begin_inset Index idx
39752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39753 Toolbar ! View / Update
39761 \begin_layout Standard
39762 \begin_inset Graphics
39763 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39770 \begin_layout Standard
39771 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39777 \begin_layout Standard
39778 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39782 \begin_layout Standard
39783 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39789 \begin_layout Standard
39790 \begin_inset Tabular
39791 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39792 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39793 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39794 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39795 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39818 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39825 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39834 arg "buffer-update"
39842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39848 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39855 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39864 arg "master-buffer-view"
39872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39878 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39880 \begin_inset space ~
39889 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39898 arg "master-buffer-update"
39906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39912 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39914 \begin_inset space ~
39918 \begin_inset space ~
39927 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39936 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39951 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39952 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39953 Synchronize with Output
39959 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39964 \begin_inset Graphics
39965 filename ../images/view-others.png
39967 groupId toolbarbuttons
39978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39984 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39985 View (Other Formats)
39991 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39996 \begin_inset Graphics
39997 filename ../images/update-others.png
39999 groupId toolbarbuttons
40008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40014 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40015 Update (Other Formats)
40028 \begin_layout Standard
40029 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40033 \begin_layout Subsection
40037 \begin_layout Standard
40038 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40039 \begin_inset space ~
40043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40045 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40049 , the table toolbar
40050 \begin_inset Index idx
40053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40062 \begin_inset space ~
40067 manual and the math macro toolbar
40068 \begin_inset Index idx
40071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40084 \begin_layout Chapter
40085 The Document Settings
40086 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40088 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40093 \begin_inset Index idx
40096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40097 Document ! Settings
40105 \begin_layout Standard
40109 \begin_inset space ~
40114 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40115 is called with the menu
40117 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40121 You can save your document settings as default with the
40123 Save as Document Defaults
40125 button in any dialog.
40126 This will create a template named
40130 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40131 when you create a new document without
40135 \begin_layout Standard
40140 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40141 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40144 \begin_layout Standard
40145 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40146 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40147 to find the one you are looking for.
40148 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40149 the submenus of the dialog.
40151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40155 \begin_inset space \space{}
40159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40166 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40167 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40168 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40171 \begin_layout Section
40175 \begin_layout Standard
40176 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40178 Document classes are described in section
40179 \begin_inset space ~
40183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40185 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40193 \begin_layout Standard
40197 \begin_inset space ~
40202 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40207 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40208 as a layout for a document class.
40209 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40211 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40220 \begin_layout Standard
40221 Some classes use special class options by default.
40222 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40226 and you can decide to use them or not.
40227 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40228 recommended you leave them untouched.
40233 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40234 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40239 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40241 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40247 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40248 \begin_inset Newline newline
40253 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40256 \begin_inset Newline newline
40259 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40260 distribution, see section
40265 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40267 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40279 \begin_layout Standard
40284 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40285 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40286 in the background if the child document
40287 is opened without its master.
40288 This way child documents are always compilable.
40289 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40296 \begin_inset space ~
40304 \begin_layout Standard
40305 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40316 \begin_inset Index idx
40319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40321 -packages ! prettyref
40327 \begin_inset Index idx
40330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40332 -packages ! refstyle
40337 for cross-references, see section
40338 \begin_inset space ~
40342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40344 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40351 \begin_layout Section
40355 \begin_layout Standard
40356 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40357 Please refer to the section
40360 \begin_inset space ~
40368 \begin_inset space ~
40373 manual for details.
40376 \begin_layout Section
40380 \begin_layout Standard
40381 Modules are explained in section
40382 \begin_inset space ~
40386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40388 reference "subsec:Modules"
40395 \begin_layout Section
40399 \begin_layout Standard
40401 \begin_inset space ~
40405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40407 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40414 \begin_layout Section
40418 \begin_layout Standard
40419 The document font settings are described in section
40420 \begin_inset space ~
40424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40426 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40433 \begin_layout Section
40437 \begin_layout Standard
40438 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40450 \begin_inset space ~
40455 and whether it should be a
40458 \begin_inset space ~
40463 can also be specified here.
40466 \begin_layout Standard
40467 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40468 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40469 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40471 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40474 \begin_layout Standard
40477 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40480 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40481 justifies the text on screen.
40482 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40486 \begin_layout Section
40490 \begin_layout Standard
40491 This dialog is described in sections
40492 \begin_inset space ~
40496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40498 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40505 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40512 \begin_layout Section
40516 \begin_layout Standard
40517 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40518 \begin_inset space ~
40522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40524 reference "subsec:Margins"
40531 \begin_layout Section
40533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40535 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40540 \begin_inset Index idx
40543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40544 Language ! Encoding
40552 \begin_layout Standard
40553 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40554 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40555 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40557 is always encoded in utf8).
40558 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40559 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40560 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40561 -command is not known for
40562 a particular character).
40565 \begin_layout Standard
40566 If you use the option
40571 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40572 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40573 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40575 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40576 exactly one encoding.
40577 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40580 \begin_layout Standard
40582 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40583 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40584 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40585 installation supports Unicode), choose
40586 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40587 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40588 is quite incomplete, so
40589 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40594 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40595 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40596 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40597 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40598 -commands is not used, because all
40599 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40600 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40601 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40602 , two new alternative engines
40603 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40605 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40607 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40610 \begin_inset space ~
40618 \begin_inset space ~
40626 \begin_inset space ~
40632 \begin_inset space ~
40636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40638 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40643 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40647 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40650 \begin_layout Standard
40654 \begin_inset space ~
40659 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40660 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40670 The possible settings are:
40673 \begin_layout Description
40674 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40676 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40677 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40681 \begin_inset space ~
40685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40687 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40694 \begin_layout Description
40695 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40696 format you will use.
40697 In many cases this will be
40702 \begin_inset Index idx
40705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40713 If the newer package
40718 \begin_inset Index idx
40721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40723 -packages ! polyglossia
40728 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40729 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40730 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
40732 this package will be used instead of
40739 \begin_layout Description
40741 \begin_inset space ~
40752 would be more appropriate.
40755 \begin_layout Description
40756 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40757 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40761 (for German texts), type in
40764 \begin_inset Newline newline
40769 usepackage{ngerman}
40772 \begin_layout Description
40773 None will not use a language package.
40774 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40777 \begin_layout Standard
40778 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40781 \begin_layout Description
40783 \begin_inset space ~
40787 \begin_inset space ~
40791 \begin_inset space ~
40798 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40804 \begin_inset Index idx
40807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40809 -packages ! inputenc
40815 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40816 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40817 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40821 \begin_layout Description
40822 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40824 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40825 commands, which may result in a big
40826 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40827 -commands are needed.
40830 \begin_layout Description
40832 \begin_inset space ~
40836 \begin_inset space ~
40839 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40842 \begin_layout Description
40844 \begin_inset space ~
40848 \begin_inset space ~
40851 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40854 \begin_layout Description
40856 \begin_inset space ~
40859 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40862 \begin_layout Description
40864 \begin_inset space ~
40868 \begin_inset space ~
40871 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40872 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40875 \begin_layout Description
40877 \begin_inset space ~
40881 \begin_inset space ~
40884 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40888 \begin_layout Description
40890 \begin_inset space ~
40894 \begin_inset space ~
40897 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40898 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40901 \begin_layout Description
40903 \begin_inset space ~
40907 \begin_inset space ~
40911 \begin_inset space ~
40914 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40915 \begin_inset space ~
40921 \begin_layout Description
40923 \begin_inset space ~
40927 \begin_inset space ~
40931 \begin_inset space ~
40934 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40935 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40938 \begin_layout Description
40940 \begin_inset space ~
40944 \begin_inset space ~
40947 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40948 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40949 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40950 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40951 \begin_inset space ~
40955 \begin_inset space ~
40961 \begin_layout Description
40963 \begin_inset space ~
40967 \begin_inset space ~
40970 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40971 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40972 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40974 should try to use the encoding Unicode
40975 \begin_inset space ~
40979 \begin_inset space ~
40985 \begin_layout Description
40987 \begin_inset space ~
40991 \begin_inset space ~
40994 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40997 \begin_layout Description
40999 \begin_inset space ~
41003 \begin_inset space ~
41006 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41009 \begin_layout Description
41011 \begin_inset space ~
41015 \begin_inset space ~
41018 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41021 \begin_layout Description
41023 \begin_inset space ~
41026 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41029 \begin_layout Description
41031 \begin_inset space ~
41034 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41037 \begin_layout Description
41039 \begin_inset space ~
41043 \begin_inset space ~
41046 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41049 \begin_layout Description
41051 \begin_inset space ~
41055 \begin_inset space ~
41061 \begin_layout Description
41063 \begin_inset space ~
41067 \begin_inset space ~
41070 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41073 \begin_layout Description
41075 \begin_inset space ~
41079 \begin_inset space ~
41085 \begin_layout Description
41087 \begin_inset space ~
41091 \begin_inset space ~
41094 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41100 \begin_inset Index idx
41103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41110 , when using this, set the document language to
41115 \begin_layout Description
41117 \begin_inset space ~
41121 \begin_inset space ~
41124 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41129 , when using this, set the document language to
41132 \begin_inset space ~
41138 \begin_layout Description
41140 \begin_inset space ~
41144 \begin_inset space ~
41147 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41153 \begin_inset Index idx
41156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41158 -packages ! japanese
41163 , when using this, set the document language to
41168 \begin_layout Description
41170 \begin_inset space ~
41174 \begin_inset space ~
41177 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41182 , when using this, set the document language to
41187 \begin_layout Description
41189 \begin_inset space ~
41193 \begin_inset space ~
41196 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41201 , when using this, set the document language to
41206 \begin_layout Description
41208 \begin_inset space ~
41211 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41214 \begin_layout Description
41216 \begin_inset space ~
41220 \begin_inset space ~
41224 \begin_inset space ~
41227 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41230 \begin_layout Description
41232 \begin_inset space ~
41236 \begin_inset space ~
41240 \begin_inset space ~
41243 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41244 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41245 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41248 \begin_layout Description
41250 \begin_inset space ~
41254 \begin_inset space ~
41260 \begin_layout Description
41262 \begin_inset space ~
41266 \begin_inset space ~
41269 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41270 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41273 \begin_layout Description
41275 \begin_inset space ~
41279 \begin_inset space ~
41282 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41288 \begin_inset Index idx
41291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41298 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41301 \begin_layout Description
41303 \begin_inset space ~
41311 \begin_inset space ~
41314 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41321 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41324 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41331 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41332 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41334 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41337 \begin_layout Description
41339 \begin_inset space ~
41343 \begin_inset space ~
41346 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41352 \begin_inset Index idx
41355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41362 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41365 \begin_layout Description
41367 \begin_inset space ~
41370 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41376 \begin_inset Index idx
41379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41381 -packages ! inputenc
41387 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41391 \begin_layout Description
41393 \begin_inset space ~
41397 \begin_inset space ~
41401 \begin_inset space ~
41404 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41405 \begin_inset space ~
41411 \begin_layout Description
41413 \begin_inset space ~
41417 \begin_inset space ~
41421 \begin_inset space ~
41424 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41425 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41426 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41430 \begin_layout Description
41432 \begin_inset space ~
41436 \begin_inset space ~
41440 \begin_inset space ~
41443 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41444 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41447 \begin_layout Section
41449 \begin_inset Index idx
41452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41459 \begin_inset Index idx
41462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41469 \begin_inset Index idx
41472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41473 Color ! Shaded boxes
41479 \begin_inset Index idx
41482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41483 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41491 \begin_layout Standard
41492 Here you can alter the font color for the
41496 (default: black), for
41499 \begin_inset space ~
41504 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41508 (default: white) and for
41511 \begin_inset space ~
41521 sets the color back to the default.
41524 \begin_layout Standard
41525 Clicking any button showing
41533 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41534 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41535 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41536 later more quickly.
41539 \begin_layout Standard
41540 Note, if you change the
41543 \begin_inset space ~
41548 font color and use the option
41551 \begin_inset space ~
41556 in the document settings under
41559 \begin_inset space ~
41564 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41565 \begin_inset space ~
41569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41571 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41578 \begin_layout Standard
41579 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41585 \begin_layout Standard
41589 \begin_inset space ~
41598 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41601 \begin_inset space ~
41604 Code after a forced page break:
41607 \begin_layout Itemize
41608 For the page color:
41609 \begin_inset Newline newline
41616 pagecolor{color name}
41619 \begin_layout Itemize
41620 For the text color:
41621 \begin_inset Newline newline
41631 \begin_layout Standard
41632 You are restricted to one of
41668 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41675 \begin_inset space ~
41681 \begin_inset Newline newline
41684 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41685 names to refer to them:
41688 \begin_layout Itemize
41694 \begin_inset Newline newline
41699 page_backgroundcolor
41702 \begin_layout Itemize
41706 \begin_inset space ~
41712 \begin_inset Newline newline
41720 \begin_layout Itemize
41724 \begin_inset space ~
41730 \begin_inset Newline newline
41738 \begin_layout Itemize
41742 \begin_inset space ~
41748 \begin_inset Newline newline
41756 \begin_layout Standard
41757 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41760 \begin_inset space ~
41768 \begin_inset space ~
41776 \begin_layout Section
41780 \begin_layout Standard
41781 Here you can adjust the
41785 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41789 as described in section
41790 \begin_inset space ~
41794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41796 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41803 \begin_layout Section
41807 \begin_layout Standard
41808 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41814 \begin_inset Index idx
41817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41829 \begin_inset Index idx
41832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41834 -packages ! jurabib
41842 Sectioned bibliography
41844 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41850 \begin_inset Index idx
41853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41855 -packages ! bibtopic
41860 and you can select a
41864 for the generation of the bibliography.
41865 For a further description see section
41866 \begin_inset space ~
41870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41872 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41879 \begin_layout Section
41883 \begin_layout Standard
41884 Here you can define the
41888 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41890 \begin_inset space ~
41894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41896 reference "sec:Index"
41903 \begin_layout Section
41907 \begin_layout Standard
41908 The PDF properties are explained in section
41909 \begin_inset space ~
41913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41915 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41922 \begin_layout Section
41926 \begin_layout Standard
41927 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
41928 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41934 \begin_inset Index idx
41937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41939 -packages ! amsmath
41949 \begin_inset Index idx
41952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41954 -packages ! amssymb
41964 \begin_inset Index idx
41967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41979 \begin_inset Index idx
41982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41994 \begin_inset Index idx
41997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41999 -packages ! mathdots
42009 \begin_inset Index idx
42012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42014 -packages ! mathtools
42024 \begin_inset Index idx
42027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42039 \begin_inset Index idx
42042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42044 -packages ! stackrel
42054 \begin_inset Index idx
42057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42059 -packages ! stmaryrd
42069 \begin_inset Index idx
42072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42074 -packages ! undertilde
42079 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42082 \begin_layout Description
42083 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42084 -errors in formulas,
42085 ensure that you have this enabled.
42088 \begin_layout Description
42089 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42090 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42091 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42095 \begin_layout Description
42096 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42099 \begin_inset space ~
42111 \begin_layout Description
42112 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42115 \begin_inset space ~
42127 \begin_layout Description
42128 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42139 \begin_layout Description
42140 mathtools is used for the math commands
42176 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42183 \begin_layout Description
42184 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42186 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42195 \begin_layout Description
42196 stackrel is used for the math command
42213 \begin_layout Description
42214 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42217 \begin_layout Description
42218 undertilde is used for the math command
42226 Accents for one Character
42235 \begin_layout Section
42239 \begin_layout Standard
42240 The float placement options are described in the section
42243 \begin_inset space ~
42251 \begin_inset space ~
42259 \begin_layout Section
42263 \begin_layout Standard
42264 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42266 Program Code Listings
42271 \begin_inset space ~
42279 \begin_layout Section
42283 \begin_layout Standard
42284 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42292 set to be used and set the
42297 The itemize environment is described in section
42298 \begin_inset space ~
42302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42304 reference "sec:Itemize"
42311 \begin_layout Standard
42312 You can furthermore specify a
42315 \begin_inset space ~
42320 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42321 command of the desired character.
42322 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42329 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42335 \begin_inset space \space{}
42339 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42349 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42350 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42353 \begin_layout Standard
42354 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42362 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42363 -packages in the preamble (menu
42366 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42367 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42370 \begin_inset space ~
42376 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42380 usepackage{textcomp}
42383 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42387 usepackage{amssymb}
42397 \begin_layout Section
42401 \begin_layout Standard
42402 Branches are described in section
42403 \begin_inset space ~
42407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42409 reference "sec:Branches"
42416 \begin_layout Section
42418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42420 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42427 \begin_layout Standard
42428 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42431 \begin_layout Description
42433 \begin_inset space ~
42437 \begin_inset space ~
42440 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42460 View Master Document
42461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42468 Update Master Document
42469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42476 menu or the toolbar.
42477 The default is set in
42479 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42480 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42482 \begin_inset space ~
42485 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42489 \begin_inset space ~
42493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42495 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42502 \begin_layout Description
42504 \begin_inset space ~
42508 \begin_inset space ~
42511 Output settings for the menu
42513 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42515 \begin_inset space ~
42521 For a detailed description see section
42523 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42528 \begin_inset space ~
42536 \begin_layout Description
42538 \begin_inset space ~
42542 \begin_inset space ~
42545 Options offers settings for the export format
42553 \begin_inset space ~
42558 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42559 \begin_inset space ~
42562 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42566 \begin_inset space ~
42571 settings are described in detail in section
42573 Math Output in XHTML
42578 \begin_inset space ~
42587 \begin_inset space ~
42591 \begin_inset space ~
42596 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42599 \begin_layout Section
42607 \begin_layout Standard
42608 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42610 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42612 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42614 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42618 \begin_layout Standard
42619 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42620 -syntax is given in section
42621 \begin_inset space ~
42625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42627 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42634 \begin_layout Chapter
42640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42642 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42647 \begin_inset Index idx
42650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42659 \begin_layout Standard
42660 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42662 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42666 It has the following submenus.
42669 \begin_layout Section
42673 \begin_layout Subsection
42677 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42678 User Interface File
42679 \begin_inset Index idx
42682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42683 Customization ! of toolbars
42689 \begin_inset Index idx
42692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42693 Customization ! of menus
42701 \begin_layout Standard
42702 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42703 interface (ui) file.
42704 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42712 \begin_layout Description
42717 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42720 \begin_layout Description
42727 the menu entries in popup context menus
42730 \begin_layout Description
42735 specifies the toolbar buttons
42738 \begin_layout Standard
42739 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42740 and edit the entries.
42743 \begin_layout Standard
42744 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42756 entries must be finished with an explicit
42781 and in the case of the
42782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42794 The syntax for the entries is:
42797 \begin_layout Standard
42798 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42827 \begin_layout Standard
42829 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42832 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42833 -functions are listed in the menu
42835 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42837 \begin_inset space ~
42845 \begin_layout Standard
42846 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42852 \begin_layout Standard
42853 For example, assuming you use the menu
42855 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42858 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42862 \begin_layout Standard
42863 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42887 \begin_layout Standard
42889 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42904 to have the sixth bookmark.
42907 \begin_layout Standard
42911 \begin_inset space ~
42916 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
42917 's toolbar buttons.
42918 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42919 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42922 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42929 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42933 \begin_layout Standard
42936 Enable tool tips in main work area
42938 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42942 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42946 \begin_layout Standard
42951 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
42952 should display in the menu
42954 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42956 \begin_inset space ~
42964 \begin_layout Subsection
42968 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42972 \begin_layout Standard
42975 Restore window layouts and geometries
42978 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
42979 the last \SpecialChar LyX
42983 \begin_layout Standard
42986 Restore cursor positions
42988 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42992 \begin_layout Standard
42995 Load opened files from last session
42997 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43001 \begin_layout Standard
43004 Clear all session information
43006 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43007 sessions (cursor positions, names
43008 of last opened documents, etc.).
43011 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43015 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43020 \begin_inset Index idx
43023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43032 \begin_layout Standard
43035 Backup original documents when saving
43037 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43038 it was saved the last time.
43039 It is stored in the
43042 \begin_inset space ~
43048 \begin_inset space ~
43052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43054 reference "sec:Paths"
43058 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43061 \begin_inset space ~
43067 The backup file has the file extension
43068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43082 \begin_layout Standard
43085 Backup documents, every
43087 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43090 \begin_layout Standard
43093 Save documents compressed by default
43095 always saves files in a compressed format.
43097 \change_inserted -195340706 1447278517
43098 This applies to newly created documents only.
43099 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving
43101 \begin_inset space ~
43105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43107 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43116 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43117 Windows & work area
43120 \begin_layout Standard
43123 Open documents in tabs
43125 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43129 \begin_layout Standard
43134 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43147 reference "sec:Paths"
43151 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43158 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43159 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43160 of \SpecialChar LyX
43162 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43163 instance is created for each file.
43166 \begin_layout Standard
43169 Single close-tab button
43171 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43174 \begin_inset Graphics
43175 filename ../images/closetab.png
43182 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43183 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43186 \begin_layout Standard
43187 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43195 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43196 before the change takes effect.
43204 \begin_layout Standard
43209 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43211 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43213 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43217 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43218 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43219 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43222 \begin_layout Subsection
43224 \begin_inset Index idx
43227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43236 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43243 \begin_layout Standard
43244 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43248 \begin_layout Standard
43249 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43257 This section only deals with the fonts
43261 the \SpecialChar LyX
43263 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43266 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43267 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43278 \begin_layout Standard
43279 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43296 (depends on the system) as its
43299 \begin_inset space ~
43315 \begin_layout Standard
43316 You can change the font size with the
43323 \begin_layout Standard
43328 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43333 points have the size of 1
43334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43338 \begin_inset space ~
43342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43344 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43349 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43354 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43355 \begin_inset space ~
43359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43361 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43368 \begin_layout Standard
43371 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43373 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43374 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43375 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43376 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43377 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43379 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43380 \begin_inset space ~
43386 \begin_layout Subsection
43388 \begin_inset Index idx
43391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43392 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43399 \begin_inset Index idx
43402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43411 \begin_layout Standard
43412 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43413 by choosing an item in the
43414 list and selecting the
43421 \begin_layout Standard
43422 By checking the option
43426 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43429 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43430 \begin_inset space ~
43434 \begin_inset space ~
43439 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43442 \begin_layout Subsection
43444 \begin_inset Index idx
43447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43456 \begin_layout Standard
43457 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43461 \begin_layout Standard
43466 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43467 This feature is described in section
43468 \begin_inset space ~
43472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43474 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43481 \begin_layout Standard
43482 Checking the option
43485 \begin_inset space ~
43489 \begin_inset space ~
43493 \begin_inset space ~
43498 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43501 \begin_layout Section
43503 \begin_inset Index idx
43506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43515 \begin_layout Subsection
43519 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43523 \begin_layout Standard
43526 Cursor follows scrollbar
43528 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43532 \begin_layout Standard
43533 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43534 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43535 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43538 \begin_layout Standard
43541 Scroll below end of document
43543 is self-explanatory.
43546 \begin_layout Standard
43547 In \SpecialChar LyX
43548 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43555 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43557 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43558 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43561 \begin_layout Standard
43564 Sort environments alphabetically
43566 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43569 \begin_layout Standard
43572 Group environments by their category
43574 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43577 \begin_layout Standard
43582 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43593 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43597 \begin_layout Standard
43598 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43603 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43604 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43608 \begin_layout Subsection
43610 \begin_inset Index idx
43613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43620 \begin_inset Index idx
43623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43624 Settings ! Shortcuts
43632 \begin_layout Standard
43637 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43639 Several binding files are available, among them:
43642 \begin_layout Description
43643 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43646 \begin_layout Description
43647 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43659 \begin_layout Description
43660 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43663 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43671 \begin_layout Standard
43672 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43677 , and binding files for special languages.
43678 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43679 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43683 \begin_inset space \space{}
43687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43695 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43696 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43697 will try to use the appropriate binding
43701 \begin_layout Standard
43702 Some binding files, like
43706 , only have a limited scope.
43707 When looking at the end of the file
43711 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43714 \begin_layout Standard
43718 \begin_inset space ~
43722 \begin_inset space ~
43727 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43728 in the selected key binding file.
43731 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43735 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43740 \begin_inset Index idx
43743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43744 Key Bindings ! Editing
43752 \begin_layout Standard
43753 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43754 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43755 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43756 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43759 Show key-bindings containing
43762 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43763 Insert there for example as keyword
43764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43771 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43772 functions that contain
43773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43781 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43782 All \SpecialChar LyX
43783 functions are also listed in the file
43788 that you will find in the
43795 \begin_layout Standard
43796 For example, to add the shortcut
43804 , select the function and press the
43809 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43810 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43813 \begin_layout Standard
43814 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43815 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43817 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43818 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43820 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43825 \begin_layout Standard
43826 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43829 \begin_layout Standard
43830 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43832 The syntax of the entries is:
43835 \begin_layout Standard
43841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43860 \begin_layout Subsection
43862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43864 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
43869 \begin_inset Index idx
43872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43879 \begin_inset Index idx
43882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43883 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43891 \begin_layout Standard
43892 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43893 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
43894 provides keyboard maps.
43895 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43896 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43899 \begin_inset space ~
43903 \begin_inset space ~
43908 and select the keyboard map file named
43915 \begin_layout Standard
43924 keyboard map and, if you use the
43928 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43931 arg "keymap-primary"
43937 arg "keymap-secondary"
43940 respectively or toggle between them with
43943 arg "keymap-toggle"
43949 \begin_layout Standard
43950 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43958 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43967 \begin_layout Standard
43968 You can also specify the mouse
43970 Wheel scrolling speed
43973 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43977 \begin_layout Standard
43985 \begin_inset space ~
43989 \begin_inset space ~
43994 you can select a key for zooming.
43995 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43998 \begin_layout Subsection
44002 \begin_layout Standard
44003 Input completion is described in section
44004 \begin_inset space ~
44008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44010 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44017 \begin_layout Section
44019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44026 \begin_inset Index idx
44029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44036 \begin_inset Index idx
44039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44048 \begin_layout Standard
44049 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44050 are normally determined during
44052 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44055 \begin_layout Description
44057 \begin_inset space ~
44060 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44061 's working directory.
44062 It is the default when you
44073 \begin_inset space ~
44081 \begin_layout Description
44083 \begin_inset space ~
44086 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44088 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44090 \begin_inset space ~
44094 \begin_inset space ~
44102 \begin_layout Description
44104 \begin_inset space ~
44107 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44113 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44117 \begin_inset Newline newline
44121 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44133 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44134 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44142 \begin_layout Description
44144 \begin_inset space ~
44148 \begin_inset Index idx
44151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44157 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44158 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44159 \begin_inset space ~
44163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44165 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44173 will be used to save the backups.
44174 \begin_inset Newline newline
44177 Backup files have the ending
44178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44188 \begin_layout Description
44190 \begin_inset space ~
44193 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44194 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44196 \begin_inset Newline newline
44203 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44209 You can edit this file with the program
44218 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44219 in its preferences under
44222 \begin_inset space ~
44228 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44233 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44235 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44236 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44242 and \SpecialChar LyX
44243 need to be running the same time.
44244 \begin_inset Newline newline
44247 The pipe is also used for the
44252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44258 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44263 \begin_inset Newline newline
44266 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44267 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44268 \begin_inset Newline newline
44284 \begin_layout Description
44286 \begin_inset space ~
44289 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44292 \begin_layout Description
44294 \begin_inset space ~
44297 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44298 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44299 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44302 \begin_layout Description
44304 \begin_inset space ~
44307 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44313 You only need to specify it if you are using
44317 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44319 For \SpecialChar LyX
44324 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44328 \begin_layout Description
44330 \begin_inset space ~
44333 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44334 When \SpecialChar LyX
44335 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44336 to find it on the system.
44337 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44339 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44348 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44349 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44352 \begin_layout Description
44354 \begin_inset space ~
44357 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44358 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44359 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44360 code or in the document
44362 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44364 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44365 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44366 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44367 scanned for the input files.
44368 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44369 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44371 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44372 compilation may fail for some documents.
44375 \begin_layout Section
44379 \begin_layout Standard
44380 Here you can insert your
44389 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44391 \begin_inset space ~
44395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44397 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44401 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44404 \begin_layout Section
44406 \begin_inset Index idx
44409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44410 Language ! Settings
44416 \begin_inset Index idx
44419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44420 Settings ! Language
44428 \begin_layout Subsection
44430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44432 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44439 \begin_layout Description
44441 \begin_inset space ~
44445 \begin_inset space ~
44448 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44450 You can find its actual translation status here:
44451 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44453 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44460 \begin_layout Description
44462 \begin_inset space ~
44465 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44466 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44467 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44468 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44485 The most widespread language package is
44490 \begin_inset Index idx
44493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44500 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44502 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44503 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44504 come with the alternative
44510 \begin_inset Index idx
44513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44515 -packages ! polyglossia
44520 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44521 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44527 The available selections are described in section
44528 \begin_inset space ~
44532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44534 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44541 \begin_layout Description
44543 \begin_inset space ~
44546 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44547 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44548 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44549 An example is the start command
44555 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44557 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44561 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44576 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44581 \begin_layout Description
44583 \begin_inset space ~
44591 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44592 command toggles the package on and off.
44595 \begin_layout Description
44597 \begin_inset space ~
44601 \begin_inset space ~
44604 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44608 \begin_layout Description
44610 \begin_inset space ~
44614 \begin_inset space ~
44617 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44621 \begin_layout Description
44623 \begin_inset space ~
44627 \begin_inset space ~
44630 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44631 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44632 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44634 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44641 \begin_layout Description
44643 \begin_inset space ~
44646 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44648 When this option is not set, the
44651 \begin_inset space ~
44656 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44658 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44661 \begin_inset space ~
44669 \begin_layout Description
44671 \begin_inset space ~
44677 \begin_inset space ~
44683 When it is not set, the
44686 \begin_inset space ~
44691 is set to the end of the document.
44694 \begin_layout Description
44696 \begin_inset space ~
44700 \begin_inset space ~
44703 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44704 language will be underlined in blue.
44707 \begin_layout Description
44709 \begin_inset space ~
44713 \begin_inset space ~
44716 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44717 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44720 \begin_layout Description
44722 \begin_inset space ~
44725 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44726 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44727 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44728 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44731 \begin_layout Subsection
44735 \begin_layout Standard
44736 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44737 \begin_inset space ~
44741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44743 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44750 \begin_layout Section
44754 \begin_layout Subsection
44758 \begin_layout Description
44760 \begin_inset space ~
44764 \begin_inset space ~
44767 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44770 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44771 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44773 \begin_inset space ~
44779 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44782 \begin_layout Description
44784 \begin_inset space ~
44788 \begin_inset Index idx
44791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44798 \begin_inset Index idx
44801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44802 Settings ! Date format
44807 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44808 \begin_inset Newline newline
44812 \begin_inset Flex URL
44815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44817 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
44823 \begin_inset Newline newline
44826 For example the format
44827 \begin_inset Newline newline
44831 \begin_inset Newline newline
44834 prints the date as day/month/year.
44837 \begin_layout Description
44839 \begin_inset space ~
44843 \begin_inset space ~
44846 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
44847 is allowed to overwrite on export.
44850 \begin_layout Description
44852 \begin_inset space ~
44855 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44857 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44859 \begin_inset space ~
44865 For a detailed description see section
44867 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44872 \begin_inset space ~
44880 \begin_layout Subsection
44886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44888 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
44893 \begin_inset Index idx
44896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44897 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
44906 \begin_layout Description
44908 \begin_inset space ~
44916 \begin_inset space ~
44920 \begin_inset space ~
44923 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44928 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44949 are used for Cyrillic.
44950 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44963 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44965 sets up in the background.
44966 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44969 \begin_layout Description
44971 \begin_inset space ~
44975 \begin_inset space ~
44978 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44983 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44987 \begin_layout Description
44989 \begin_inset space ~
44993 \begin_inset space ~
44997 \begin_inset space ~
45001 \begin_inset space ~
45004 options They only have an effect when the program
45008 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45011 \begin_layout Standard
45012 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45013 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45014 manuals of the applications.
45017 \begin_layout Description
45019 \begin_inset space ~
45022 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45023 \begin_inset space ~
45027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45029 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45036 \begin_layout Description
45038 \begin_inset space ~
45041 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45042 \begin_inset space ~
45046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45048 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45055 \begin_layout Description
45057 \begin_inset space ~
45060 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45061 \begin_inset space ~
45065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45067 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45074 \begin_layout Description
45080 \begin_inset space ~
45083 command Command for the program
45085 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45088 that is described in the section
45090 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45095 Additional Features
45100 \begin_layout Standard
45101 There are additionally the following options:
45104 \begin_layout Description
45106 \begin_inset space ~
45110 \begin_inset space ~
45114 \begin_inset space ~
45118 \begin_inset space ~
45123 \begin_inset space ~
45126 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45144 to separate folders.
45145 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45147 \begin_inset Index idx
45150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45157 \begin_inset Index idx
45160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45169 \begin_layout Description
45171 \begin_inset space ~
45175 \begin_inset space ~
45179 \begin_inset space ~
45183 \begin_inset space ~
45187 \begin_inset space ~
45191 \begin_inset space ~
45194 changes Removes all manually set
45200 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45201 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45203 \begin_inset space ~
45208 dialog when changing the document class.
45211 \begin_layout Section
45213 \begin_inset space ~
45217 \begin_inset Index idx
45220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45229 \begin_layout Subsection
45231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45233 name "subsec:Converters"
45238 \begin_inset Index idx
45241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45250 \begin_layout Standard
45251 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45252 from one format to another.
45253 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45254 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45261 \begin_inset space ~
45266 field and press the
45271 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45275 \begin_inset space ~
45280 drop-down list, modify the
45284 field and press the
45291 \begin_layout Standard
45294 Converter File Cache
45300 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45302 Maximum Age (in days
45305 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45306 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45309 \begin_layout Standard
45310 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45311 definition, is described in the section
45322 \begin_layout Subsection
45324 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45326 name "sec:File-Formats"
45331 \begin_inset Index idx
45334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45341 \begin_inset Index idx
45344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45353 \begin_layout Standard
45354 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45364 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45367 \begin_layout Standard
45368 You can also define the
45370 Default output format
45372 that is used when you use
45374 View, Update, View Master Document
45378 Update Master Document
45384 menu or the toolbar.
45387 \begin_layout Standard
45388 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45399 \begin_layout Standard
45400 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45402 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45403 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45404 This is done by specifying a
45409 More about this is described in the section
45420 \begin_layout Chapter
45421 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45423 \begin_inset Index idx
45426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45435 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45442 \begin_layout Standard
45444 \begin_inset space ~
45448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45450 reference "tab:Units"
45454 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45455 and used in this documentation.
45458 \begin_layout Standard
45459 \begin_inset Float table
45465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45466 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45484 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45492 \begin_inset Tabular
45493 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45494 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45495 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45496 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45497 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45630 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45634 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45671 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45703 scaled point (65536
45704 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45708 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45741 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45782 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45819 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45855 % of original image width
45860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46171 \begin_layout Chapter
46173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46175 name "chap:Credits"
46182 \begin_layout Standard
46183 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46184 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46187 \begin_layout Itemize
46190 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46193 \begin_layout Itemize
46199 \begin_layout Itemize
46205 \begin_layout Itemize
46211 \begin_layout Itemize
46217 \begin_layout Itemize
46223 \begin_layout Itemize
46229 \begin_layout Itemize
46235 \begin_layout Itemize
46238 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46241 \begin_layout Itemize
46247 \begin_layout Itemize
46253 \begin_layout Itemize
46259 \begin_layout Itemize
46265 \begin_layout Itemize
46271 \begin_layout Itemize
46277 \begin_layout Itemize
46283 \begin_layout Itemize
46289 \begin_layout Itemize
46290 The \SpecialChar LyX
46292 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46301 \begin_layout Standard
46302 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46305 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46312 \begin_layout Bibliography
46313 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46314 LatexCommand bibitem
46320 The \SpecialChar LyX
46322 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46325 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46330 \begin_inset Newline newline
46334 \begin_inset Flex URL
46337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46339 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46347 \begin_layout Bibliography
46348 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46349 LatexCommand bibitem
46350 key "latexcompanion"
46354 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46356 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46357 Companion Second Edition.
46360 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46363 \begin_layout Bibliography
46364 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46365 LatexCommand bibitem
46370 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46373 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46377 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46380 \begin_layout Bibliography
46381 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46382 LatexCommand bibitem
46390 : A Document Preparation System.
46393 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46396 \begin_layout Bibliography
46397 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46398 LatexCommand bibitem
46407 The \SpecialChar TeX
46411 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46414 \begin_layout Bibliography
46415 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46416 LatexCommand bibitem
46421 The \SpecialChar TeX
46423 \begin_inset Newline newline
46427 \begin_inset Flex URL
46430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46432 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46440 \begin_layout Bibliography
46441 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46442 LatexCommand bibitem
46447 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46449 \begin_inset Newline newline
46453 \begin_inset Flex URL
46456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46458 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46466 \begin_layout Bibliography
46467 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46468 LatexCommand bibitem
46474 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46476 name "Documentation"
46477 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46483 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46487 \begin_inset Newline newline
46491 \begin_inset Flex URL
46494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46496 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46504 \begin_layout Bibliography
46505 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46506 LatexCommand bibitem
46512 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46514 name "Documentation"
46515 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46519 how to use the program
46521 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46525 \begin_inset Newline newline
46529 \begin_inset Flex URL
46532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46534 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46542 \begin_layout Bibliography
46543 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46544 LatexCommand bibitem
46550 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46552 name "Documentation"
46553 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46562 \begin_inset Newline newline
46566 \begin_inset Flex URL
46569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46571 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46579 \begin_layout Bibliography
46580 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46581 LatexCommand bibitem
46587 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46589 name "Documentation"
46590 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46599 \begin_inset Newline newline
46603 \begin_inset Flex URL
46606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46608 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46616 \begin_layout Bibliography
46617 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46618 LatexCommand bibitem
46624 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46626 name "Documentation"
46627 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46631 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46633 \begin_inset Newline newline
46637 \begin_inset Flex URL
46640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46642 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46650 \begin_layout Bibliography
46651 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46652 LatexCommand bibitem
46658 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46660 name "Documentation"
46661 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46665 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46671 \begin_inset Index idx
46674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46676 -packages ! caption
46682 \begin_inset Newline newline
46686 \begin_inset Flex URL
46689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46691 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46699 \begin_layout Bibliography
46700 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46701 LatexCommand bibitem
46707 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46709 name "Documentation"
46710 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46714 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46720 \begin_inset Index idx
46723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46725 -packages ! enumitem
46731 \begin_inset Newline newline
46735 \begin_inset Flex URL
46738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46740 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46748 \begin_layout Bibliography
46749 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46750 LatexCommand bibitem
46756 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46758 name "Documentation"
46759 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46763 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46769 \begin_inset Index idx
46772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46774 -packages ! fancyhdr
46780 \begin_inset Newline newline
46784 \begin_inset Flex URL
46787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46789 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46797 \begin_layout Bibliography
46798 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46799 LatexCommand bibitem
46805 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46807 name "Documentation"
46808 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46812 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46818 \begin_inset Index idx
46821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46823 -packages ! hyperref
46829 \begin_inset Newline newline
46833 \begin_inset Flex URL
46836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46838 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46846 \begin_layout Bibliography
46847 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46848 LatexCommand bibitem
46854 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46856 name "Documentation"
46857 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46861 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46867 \begin_inset Index idx
46870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46872 -packages ! nomencl
46878 \begin_inset Newline newline
46882 \begin_inset Flex URL
46885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46887 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46895 \begin_layout Bibliography
46896 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46897 LatexCommand bibitem
46903 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46905 name "Documentation"
46906 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46910 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46916 \begin_inset Index idx
46919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46921 -packages ! prettyref
46927 \begin_inset Newline newline
46931 \begin_inset Flex URL
46934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46936 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46944 \begin_layout Bibliography
46945 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46946 LatexCommand bibitem
46952 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46954 name "Documentation"
46955 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46959 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46965 \begin_inset Index idx
46968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46970 -packages ! refstyle
46976 \begin_inset Newline newline
46980 \begin_inset Flex URL
46983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46985 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46993 \begin_layout Bibliography
46994 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46995 LatexCommand bibitem
47001 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47004 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47008 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47010 \begin_inset Newline newline
47014 \begin_inset Flex URL
47017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47019 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47027 \begin_layout Bibliography
47028 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47029 LatexCommand bibitem
47035 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47038 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47042 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47044 \begin_inset Newline newline
47048 \begin_inset Flex URL
47051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47053 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47061 \begin_layout Bibliography
47062 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47063 LatexCommand bibitem
47069 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47072 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47076 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47077 for Cyrillic languages:
47078 \begin_inset Newline newline
47082 \begin_inset Flex URL
47085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47087 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47095 \begin_layout Bibliography
47096 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47097 LatexCommand bibitem
47103 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47106 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47110 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47112 \begin_inset Newline newline
47116 \begin_inset Flex URL
47119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47121 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47129 \begin_layout Bibliography
47130 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47131 LatexCommand bibitem
47137 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47140 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47144 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47146 \begin_inset Newline newline
47150 \begin_inset Flex URL
47153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47155 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47163 \begin_layout Bibliography
47164 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47165 LatexCommand bibitem
47171 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47174 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47178 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47180 \begin_inset Newline newline
47184 \begin_inset Flex URL
47187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47189 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47197 \begin_layout Bibliography
47198 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47199 LatexCommand bibitem
47205 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47208 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47212 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47214 \begin_inset Newline newline
47218 \begin_inset Flex URL
47221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47223 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47231 \begin_layout Bibliography
47232 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47233 LatexCommand bibitem
47239 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47242 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47246 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47248 \begin_inset Newline newline
47252 \begin_inset Flex URL
47255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47257 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47265 \begin_layout Bibliography
47266 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47267 LatexCommand bibitem
47273 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47276 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47280 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47282 \begin_inset Newline newline
47286 \begin_inset Flex URL
47289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47291 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47299 \begin_layout Bibliography
47300 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47301 LatexCommand bibitem
47307 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47310 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47314 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47316 \begin_inset Newline newline
47320 \begin_inset Flex URL
47323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47325 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47333 \begin_layout Bibliography
47334 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47335 LatexCommand bibitem
47341 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47344 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47348 about new features in
47354 \begin_inset Newline newline
47358 \begin_inset Flex URL
47361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47363 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47371 \begin_layout Standard
47372 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47406 \begin_inset Note Note
47409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47416 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47417 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47418 bibliography is the second one:
47426 \begin_layout Standard
47427 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47428 LatexCommand bibtex
47429 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47430 options "biblio/alphadin"
47437 \begin_layout Standard
47438 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47442 \begin_layout Standard
47443 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47444 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47450 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47451 LatexCommand printindex